Control Valve Actuators

Table of contents 9.  Control valve actuators 9.1 General  ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������001 9.1.1.  Actuator types ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������001 9.1.2.  Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators �������������������������������������002 9.2  Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement  ���������������������������005 9.2.1.  Pneumatic diaphragm actuator �������������������������������������������������������������������005 9.2.1.1  Forces in valve and actuator ����������������������������������������������������������007 9.2.2.  Lay-out of a suitable valve actuator ������������������������������������������������������������ 010 9.2.3.  Required actuator thrust for globe valves ��������������������������������������������������� 011 9.2.4.  Dynamic forces need to be considered in case of flow to close tendencies  ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 013 9.2.5.  Calculation and selection of an actuator ����������������������������������������������������� 019 9.2.5.1  General notes for the calculation and selection of actuators ��������� 019 9.2.6.  Fail-safe action  ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 021 9.2.6.1  Major application cases �����������������������������������������������������������������022 9.2.6.2  Flow force ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������022 9.2.6.3  Sealing, friction and other forces ���������������������������������������������������024 9.2.6.4  Actuator force Fa in all cases of (a) to (f) Chapter 9.2.6.1 ��������������025 9.2.6.5  Safety factors to actuator sizing  ��������������������������������������������������028 9.2.6.6  Calculation examples (pressure balance):  ������������������������������������029 9.2.6.7  Calculation of the Hysteresis: ��������������������������������������������������������032 9.2.6.8  Required actuator torque for rotary valves ������������������������������������032 9.2.6.9  Actuator torque for standard butterfly valves ���������������������������������033 9.2.7.  The main group of the pneumatic diaphragm linear actuators ��������������������036 9.2.8.  Technical data for Packing and Plug stem diameter  ����������������������������������038

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.2.9.  Technical data for additional handwheel �����������������������������������������������������038 9.2.10.  Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop ��������������������������������������039 9.2.11.  Manual operation ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������040 9.2.11.1  Pneumatic actuator Type 3277 with handwheel ���������������������������� 041 9.2.11.2  Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted ���������������043 9.2.11.3  Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 attached to Type 3241 Valve 044 9.2.12.  Actuator Selection with AC-Trim ����������������������������������������������������������������045 9.2.13.  Control valves in case of fire ���������������������������������������������������������������������046 9.2.13.1  Safety cartridge ����������������������������������������������������������������������������047 9.2.13.2  Fire-Safe / Fire lock ���������������������������������������������������������������������049 9.2.13.3  Simulation of a fire �����������������������������������������������������������������������050 9.2.13.4  Reversible operating direction ������������������������������������������������������ 051 9.2.13.5 Summary �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������052 9.2.14.  Overview of actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5 up to a diaphragm area 120 cm2. ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������053 9.2.15.  Overview of actuators Type 3271 up to a diaphragm area 1000 cm2. �������060 9.2.16.  Overview of the actuators of 1400 cm2 up to a diaphragm area 2 x 2800 cm2. �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������066 9.2.17.  Overview of actuators Type 3277 up to a diaphragm area 1000 cm2.  ������ 070 9.2.18.  Overview of Actuators Type 3371, 3372, Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 � 077 9.2.19.  Actuators Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 ������������������������������������������������� 078 9.2.20.  Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372  �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������081 9.2.20.1  Technical data · Pressures in psi and bar ������������������������������������083 9.2.21.  The cost-efficient positioner Type 3725 ����������������������������������������������������084 9.2.22.  Operating travels for fail-safe action ���������������������������������������������������������085

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.2.22.1  Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS ���������������086 9.2.22.2  Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS ������������092 9.2.23.  Pneumatic piston actuator ������������������������������������������������������������������������097 9.2.24.  Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275 ������������������������������������������������������097 9.2.25.  Principle of operation ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������098 9.2.26.  Mounting Servovalve actuators on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves  �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������100 9.2.26.1  PD Pneumatic linear actuator  �����������������������������������������������������100 9.2.26.2  Double Acting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 101 9.2.26.3  Double Acting with Handwheel ���������������������������������������������������� 101 9.2.26.4  Double Acting with Manual Gear ������������������������������������������������� 102 9.2.26.5  Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump �������������������������������� 102 9.2.27.  Rack and pinion pneumatic actuator ��������������������������������������������������������� 108 9.2.27.1  AIR TORQUE delivery program ���������������������������������������������������109 9.2.27.2 Design ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������111 9.2.27.3 Construction ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������111 9.2.27.4  Range of Options, ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 113 9.2.27.5  Quality Manufacturing ������������������������������������������������������������������ 113 9.2.27.6  Accessories available ������������������������������������������������������������������ 113 9.2.27.7  Multi-function indicator ����������������������������������������������������������������� 114 9.2.27.8  Operating conditions �������������������������������������������������������������������� 116 9.2.27.9  Operating function and direction of rotation ��������������������������������� 117 9.2.27.10  Torque diagram Double Acting actuators ����������������������������������� 118 9.2.27.11  Spring Return Actuator ��������������������������������������������������������������� 118 9.2.27.12  Air Torque Actuator Sizing  ��������������������������������������������������������� 121

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.2.27.13  Sizing information ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 122 9.2.27.14  4th Generation pneumatic actuator �������������������������������������������� 124 9.2.27.15  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 051  ��������������������������������������������� 125 9.2.27.16  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 101  �������������������������������������������� 126 9.2.27.17  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 201 ��������������������������������������������� 127 9.2.27.18  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 251 ���������������������������������������������� 128 9.2.27.19  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 301 ��������������������������������������������� 129 9.2.27.20  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 351 ��������������������������������������������� 130 9.2.27.21  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 401 ��������������������������������������������� 131 9.2.27.22  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 451 ��������������������������������������������� 132 9.2.27.23  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 501 ��������������������������������������������� 133 9.2.27.24  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 551 ��������������������������������������������� 134 9.2.27.25  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 601 ��������������������������������������������� 135 9.2.27.26  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 651 ��������������������������������������������� 136 9.2.27.27  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 701 ��������������������������������������������� 137 9.2.27.28  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 801 ��������������������������������������������� 138 9.2.27.29  Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator ������������������������� 139 9.2.27.30  Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator ������������������������� 140 9.2.27.31  Full compliance with worldwide specifications ��������������������������� 141 9.2.27.32  Company Approvals  ����������������������������������������������������������������� 143 9.2.28.  Rotary Actuator Type 3278  ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 144 9.2.29.  Pneumatic actuators of company Pfeiffer-Armaturen GmbH �������������������� 146 9.2.29.1  Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a ������������������������������� 147 9.2.29.2  Additional equipment and add-on pieces: ����������������������������������� 148 9.2.29.3  Pfeiffer AT - Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a ����������������������� 149

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.2.29.4  Additional equipment and add-on pieces: ����������������������������������� 150 9.2.29.5  Safety position: ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 150 9.2.29.6  Air drive torque ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 151 9.2.30.  Pneumatic actuators of company VETEC Ventiltechnik GmbH ���������������� 152 9.2.30.1  Diaphragm or rotary actuators ����������������������������������������������������� 153 9.2.30.2  Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position: ������������ 155 9.2.31.  VETEC Actuator Type R (rolling diaphragm or rotary actuator) ���������������� 156 9.2.31.1  Principle of operation: ������������������������������������������������������������������ 158 9.2.32.  VETEC Actuator Type AT (Rack and Piston actuator) ������������������������������ 160 9.2.32.1  Principle of operation ������������������������������������������������������������������� 162 9.2.33.  New design features ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 165 9.2.33.1  Vetec Type 62.7 AT short pattern with flanges ����������������������������� 165 9.2.33.2  Vetec Type 82.7 R short pattern with flanges ������������������������������ 165 9.2.34.  VETEC Actuator Type MN (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ������������������������ 166 9.2.34.1  Principle of operation ������������������������������������������������������������������� 167 9.2.35.  VETEC Actuator Type MD (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ������������������������ 168 9.2.35.1  Principle of operation ������������������������������������������������������������������� 169 9.2.36.  VETEC Actuator Type MZ (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ������������������������ 171 9.2.36.1  Principle of operation ������������������������������������������������������������������� 172 9.2.37.  VETEC Actuator Type S (rotary or diaphragm actuator) ��������������������������� 174 9.2.37.1  Principle of operation ������������������������������������������������������������������� 176 9.3  Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators  ����������������������177 9.3.1.  Symmetrical scotch-yoke ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 179 9.3.2.  Canted scotch-yoke ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 179 9.3.3.  Scotch Yoke ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 180

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.3.4.  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators ������������������������������������������������������������� 181 9.3.5.  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators ������������������������������������������������������������� 182 9.3.5.1 Applications ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 183 9.4  Electric with a linear or rotational movement  ������������������������������������������������184 9.4.1.  Electro-mechanical Actuators ���������������������������������������������������������������������184 9.4.2.  Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuator ������������������������������������� 186 9.4.2.1  Electric Actuator Type 5857 ����������������������������������������������������������� 188 9.4.2.2  Accessories for version with digital positioner ������������������������������� 189 9.4.2.3  Additional electrical equipment ������������������������������������������������������190 9.4.2.4  Electrical connection ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 192 9.4.3.  Controller with Electric Actuator Type 5757 ������������������������������������������������ 193 9.4.3.1 Application �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������194 9.4.4.  Electric Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725 �����������������������������������������������196 9.4.4.1  Type 5724 �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 197 9.4.4.2  Type 5725 �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 197 9.4.4.3  Examples of electrical actuator Type 5824/5825 with various control valves ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������199 9.4.5.  Electro-hydraulic actuator ���������������������������������������������������������������������������200 9.4.6.  Electrohydraulic Actuators Types 3274-11 to -23 ����������������������������������������203 9.4.7.  Electric Actuator Type 3374 �������������������������������������������������������������������������209 9.4.7.1  Principle of operation ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 211 9.4.7.2  Fail-safe action ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 211 9.4.8.  Electric Actuator Type 3375 ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 214 9.4.9.  Electro-mechanical Actuators - PSL Overview ������������������������������������������� 216 9.4.9.1  PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators ������������������������������������������������ 219

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.4.9.2  PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators ������������������������������������������������221 9.4.9.3  Optional Accessories ���������������������������������������������������������������������224 9.4.9.4  Mounting the PSL Actuator onto the Valves SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, and 3280. �����������������������������������������������������������������������������225 9.4.9.5  Type of limit cut-off ������������������������������������������������������������������������225 9.4.9.6  Force/stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off �����������������������������������226 9.4.9.7  Stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off ���������������������������������������������227 9.4.9.8  Electric Supply �������������������������������������������������������������������������������228 9.4.9.9  Wiring diagram ������������������������������������������������������������������������������228 9.4.9.10  Maximum thermal switch loading �������������������������������������������������229 9.4.10.  Electric actuators outside source ��������������������������������������������������������������230 9.4.10.1  Linear Actuator Type SAM ������������������������������������������������������������232 9.4.10.2  Principle of operation �������������������������������������������������������������������233 9.4.10.3  Electrical connection ��������������������������������������������������������������������235 9.4.11.  Electronic actuators of Company AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG ������������236 9.4.11.1  Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.2 to SAR 30.2 ���������������������������������� 237 9.4.11.2  Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators ������239 9.4.11.3  Range of application ���������������������������������������������������������������������240 9.4.11.4  Mounting to valve ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 242 9.4.11.5  Actuators without integral controls (AUMA NORM) ����������������������245 9.4.11.6  Actuators with integral controls �����������������������������������������������������245 9.4.11.7  AUMA MATIC AM �������������������������������������������������������������������������245 9.4.11.8  AUMATIC AC �������������������������������������������������������������������������������246 9.4.11.9  Electric rotary-type actuator for control service (AUMA RIESTER KG) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 247 9.4.11.10  Electric rotary-type actuator for control service �������������������������� 249

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.4.11.11  Standard version �������������������������������������������������������������������������250 9.4.11.12 Accessories ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������250 9.4.11.13 Motor ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 251 9.4.11.14  AUMA MATIC �����������������������������������������������������������������������������254 9.4.11.15  Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1 ��������������258 9.5  Explosion-protected actuator  ��������������������������������������������������������������������������259 9.5.1.  What is an explosion? ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������259 9.5.2.  What is explosion protection? ���������������������������������������������������������������������259 9.5.3.  ATEX Directive 94/9/EC �����������������������������������������������������������������������������259 9.5.4.  Classification of potentially explosive atmospheres ������������������������������������260 9.5.5.  Zone/equipment category ���������������������������������������������������������������������������260 9.5.6.  Explosion group/temperature class ������������������������������������������������������������ 261 9.5.7.  How to achieve explosion protection? ���������������������������������������������������������263 9.5.7.1  Increased safety (EEx e) ����������������������������������������������������������������263 9.5.7.2  Flameproof enclosure (EEx d) �������������������������������������������������������263 9.5.7.3  Constructional safety (c) ����������������������������������������������������������������264 9.5.7.4  Who tests what? ����������������������������������������������������������������������������264 9.5.7.5  Auma Marking ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������265 9.5.7.6  Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection �������������266 9.5.8.  Explosion-protected actuator ����������������������������������������������������������������������269 9.5.8.1  Explosion-protected actuator from Company SCHISCHEK ����������� 270 9.5.8.2  Accessories and special designs (additional price) ����������������������� 272 9.5.8.3  Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type ExRun ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 273 9.5.8.4  Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type RedRun ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 274

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Table of contents 9.5.8.5  Wiring diagram of Type ExRun ������������������������������������������������������ 276 9.5.9.  Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator ������������� 278 9.6  Hydraulic with a linear movement  ������������������������������������������������������������������279 9.6.1.  Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators �������������������������������������������������������280 9.6.1.1  Reliability by Design ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 281 9.6.1.2  Safety by Design ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 281 9.6.1.3  High Performance by Design ��������������������������������������������������������� 281 9.6.1.4  Override Options ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 281 9.6.1.5  Key Design Features ����������������������������������������������������������������������282 9.6.1.6  VETEC Rotary valve with Pleiger hydraulic actuator ����������������������283 9.6.2.  Hydraulic- actuating systems of Welland & Tuxhorn AG �����������������������������284 9.6.2.1 Functions ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������285 9.6.2.2 Design �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������286 9.6.2.3  Setup of an electro-hydraulic Control Loop �����������������������������������286 9.6.2.4  Hydraulic Servo-Systems - Establishment and Manufacturing ������288 9.7  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7  ����������������������289 9.8  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1  ���������290

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

General

Page 001 of 292

9.  Control valve actuators

9.1  General The control effectiveness of a control loop is unquestionable determined by the weakest element of the chain. This is often the valve actuator. If one presupposes a continuity of the control valve characteristic i.e. an inherent characteristic curve without turning points, the quality of the actuator is, for an attainable control effectiveness, in most cases, more important than the quality of the valve characteristic curve. The following chapter illustrates the different actuator principles, explains the authoritative parameters for an actuator selection and focuses above all on the calculation of the required actuator thrust and the selection of a suitable actuator type. A purely static or quasi static consideration however is not sufficient to describe the complicated interactions between the control valve and the actuator. Rather dynamic forces must also be considered for critical applications. Unfortunately, there are no obligatory references available in the corresponding literature which will permit a generalization and a simple calculation method with regard to dynamic forces. Therefore the given recommendations are based on the calculation of the SAMSON group experts, their valve sizing software and the authors. The majority of all industrial control valves installed worldwide is even today still driven by pneumatic diaphragm actuators. This actuator type is therefore of course in the center of interest and attention. 9.1.1.  Actuator types A first criterion in the distinguishing of different actuator types is the style and the manner in which the actuator thrust is generated. Here the user can select from the following actuating principles: Diaphragm Pneumatic with a linear or rotational movement

Piston Rack & Pinion Scotch Yoke

Actuator

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Electro-mechanical Electro-hydraulic

Scotch Yoke

Figure 9.1.1.-1:  Actuator types

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 002 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.1.2.  Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators Symbol

Source

Unit

Required (effective) diaphragm area Actuator stem sealing force and other forces Spring stiffness = A∙(pst100 - pst0) ∙ H/Hnom. Pressure balance cylinder diameter Shaft diameter of rotary valve FTC correction factor of fluid force F∆p (open) Friction coefficient dependent on stem seal

SVS SVS SVS SVS -

cm2 -

SVS

N/mm

f2

Coefficient depended on required seat sealing Class

SVS

N/mm

f3 Fa FB

Friction coefficient for pressure balanced plugs Effective actuator force (thrust) Bellows elastic force

SVS SVS SVS

N/mm N N

Ff

Ff = pst0 = pre-load spring trust

SVS

N

Fa/Fo

Minimum safety value, Close safety factor

SVS

-

FS/Fw

Open safety factor (SAMSON sizing Ff = FS)

SVS

-

Force due to weight, force due to acceleration) Required actuator force (thrust) pressure balanced. Actuator trust: Max. allowed trust depends to max. temperature

SVS SVS

N N

A c CS Da dsd f f1

FM Fm Fmax.

Meaning

mm mm

Fmreq.

Required actuator thrust Fmrequ. = Fp1+FSF+FR+FRB+FM

SVS

N

Foreq. Fo FP

Required actuator trust Required actuator force (thrust). Pressure force (Pst ∙ A)

SVS SVS SVS

N N N

Fp1

Flow (fluid) forces pressure balance f(p1) Fp1 = π / 4 ∙ Sd2

SVS

N

FR

Friction force caused by stuffing box (packing) FR = π ∙ f1 ∙ Sd

SVS

N

FRa

Friction force (negligible in diaphragm actuator)

SVS

N

FRB

Friction force (pressure balance sealing force) FRB = π ∙ f3 ∙ Da

SVS

N

SVS

N

SVS

N

SVS

N

FS FSE FSF

Spring pre-load trust FS = pst0 · A Spring force (elastic) Air to open: FSE = FS + CS ∙ H Air to close: FSE = FS + CS ∙ (Hnom. – H) Sealing force (seat loading force) when valve closed; FSF = π ∙ (f2 ∙ Sb)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

General

Page 003 of 292

9.1.2.  Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators Symbol F∆p Fw g Hnom. H h

Meaning Flow (fluid) forces

Source

Unit

SVS

N

Total friction force of valve and actuator system Fw = FR+c Fw = FR+FRB+c ← in case of pressure balance Gravity acceleration g = 9.81 m/s2 Rated (nominal) travel Actual travel Relative travel = H/Hnom.

SVS

N

SVS SVS 60534-1

Relative travel = H/Hnom.· 100

60534-9

m/s2 mm mm %

M

Mass of plug and actuator stem system

MA

Actuator torque

SVS

Nm

Mdyn

Dynamic torque

SVS

Nm

ML

Bearing friction torque

SVS

Nm

MSt

Shaft sealing torque

SVS

Nm

∆pA

Specified shut down pressure for actuator sizing: take care to the required seat leakage rate and valve strength parameter

bar

∆p

Pressure differential p1 - p2

bar

∆p0

Pressure differential at 0 % flow or near to min. flow

bar

∆p100

Pressure differential at 100 % flow or near to max. flow Allowed ∆p depends to the chosen actuator and strength of the stem with pressure balance

p1max

∆pmax

p1max. =

(Fa − FSF − FRB − c ) S d2 ⋅

SVS

bar

SVS

bar

SVS SVS

bar barg

π

10 ⋅ 4

Allowed ∆p depends to the chosen actuator and strength of the stem ∆pmax on plug calculation max. force see also ∆pA ∆pmax > ∆pA > ∆p0 without pressure balance

(Fa − FSF − FR − c ) ∆pmax. = π Sb2 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 4

∆ps pst

Min. required air supply – pst100 for fail safe ATC Signal pressure

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 004 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.1.2.  Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators Symbol

Meaning

Source

Unit

psu

Supply pressure

SVS

barg

pst0

Lower value: spring range

SVS

barg

pst100

Upper value: spring range

SVS

barg

ps0req.

Min. required pre-load spring force pst0 for fail safe ATO

SVS

barg

Sb

Seat bore diameter

SVS

mm

qvmax.

Operation condition

m3/h

qvmin.

Operation condition

m3/h

Sd S0 SB Sz SB 1 SB 2 SF S stat. S dyn.

Stem diameter Spring trust / torque characteristic (assumed linear) Actuator trust Fa = pst ∙ A to travel from 0 to 100 % Fluid closing force {f (∆p characteristic)} Required torque MA = pst ∙ A (to open rotary valve) Required torque MA = pst ∙ A (to close rotary valve) Safety factor Break-off and friction torque (±) f(∆p characteristic) Dynamic torque with closing tendency (-) f(∆p characteristic)

SVS

mm N / Nm

SVS

N N N N N

Valve-Actuator opening and closing time (See Chapter 20) acc

Index for actuator accessories

pa

Atmospheric pressure

SVS

bar

Supply network pressure

SVS

barg

Stroking time of pneumatic actuator

SVS

s

to1, to2, Opening times: for valve opening to3

SVS

s

to1, to2, Closing times: for valve closing to3

SVS

s

SVS

K K

SVS

m3

pNV t

T1 TA VA

Inlet temperature Temperature in actuator internal volumes Actuator internal volume, (diaphragm chamber, filled with air)

-

V AV

Actuator internal volume differential quotient

SVS

m3 d/dt

V0

Dead volume f(A)

SVS

m3

Table 9.1.2.-1:  Symbols and units for the calculation of Actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 005 of 292

9.2  Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement The majority of final control elements in the classical process industries are still today controlled by pneumatic actuators. Either continuously regulated or activated according to a desired On-Off service, i.e. simply driven into one of the two possible end positions. Pneumatic actuators can be divided into two main categories: „„ Pneumatic diaphragm actuators „„ Pneumatic piston actuators 9.2.1.  Pneumatic diaphragm actuator The biggest percentage of all control valves installed worldwide in process industries are activated by pneumatic diaphragm actuators. This actuator type essentially consists of two metal shells (the diaphragm housing), the actuator stem and the diaphragm plate. The actuator thrust is transmitted via the high-strength, fabric-inserted diaphragm and the diaphragm plate onto the actuator stem (Figure 9.2.1.1.-1 and Figure 9.2.1.-2). Unlike a piston actuator, whose travel depends on the length of the cylinder and the piston-rod, the travel of the pneumatic diaphragm actuator is limited by the shape of the case and the diaphragm. Within a limited travel range, the diaphragm area remains almost constant. High flexibility of the diaphragm ensures a minimum friction and hysteresis. These qualities predestine the pneumatic diaphragm actuator particularly for control tasks where a high actuator thrust, a good sensitivity and low supply pressures (2.5 to 4.0 bar) are important.

Pneumatic diaphragm actuators are usually designed for maximum supply pressures of approximately 6.0 bar. If one were to increase the supply pressure at room temperature, up to the destruction of the actuator, it would work out that, in most cases, the diaphragm would prove to be by no means the weakest part of the actuator. Rather, the actuator housing and the supporting diaphragm plates would normally deform beyond the permissible range before we reached a rupture of the strong diaphragm. Temperature limits for Diaphragm actuator Diaphragm area

Diaphragm material: NBR

Diaphragm material: EPDM

80 to 120 cm2

- 35** to + 90 °C

On request

240 to 700 cm2

- 35** to + 90 °C

- 50 to + 120 °C

1400 to 2800 cm2

- 40** to + 90 °C

On request

** In on/off service, the lowest value for the NBR diaphragm increases to -20 °C. Table 9.2.1.-1:  Temperature limits for Diaphragm actuator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 006 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

There are some reasons to limit the air supply at values < 6 bar to avoid over-stressing of actuator parts and also the valve trim-stem system „„ On-off operations at higher frequencies „„ In case of travel stops or other accessories, not designed for 6 bar „„ Larger actuators with fail safe ATC need to be handled with care regarding too high closing trust: Fa = A ∙ (psu - pst100). „„ Supply pressure regulators (mass production) or supply service units are responsible to limit the max. actuator trust to avoid mechanical damage. If this relatively inexpensive devices are responsible for the safety function of “high end” special valves (like compressor anti surge valves to protect expensive flow machines) long term reliability must be guaranteed. If at some locations commissioning, proper maintenance and instrumentation air quality cannot be guaranteed such dirt and oil sensitive pressure reduction equipment should be avoided. In case of too high air supply the actuator can be sized with spring bench rates which reduce the closing trust of the ATC application, e.g. spring bench rate 0.8 to 2.4 bar or 1.6 to 3.2 bar.

SAMSON AG developed worldwide the first actuator with parallel spring design which seems to be the state-of-the-art on long term. The SAMSON Types 3271 and 3277 Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. A maximum of 30 springs can be installed, partly fitted inside one another. Special features „„ Low overall height „„ Powerful thrust at high response speed „„ Low friction „„ Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression „„ No special tools required to change the bench range and to reverse the actuator action (also version with handwheel) „„ Permissible operating temperatures from –50 to +120 °C „„ Direct attachment of accessories on additional yoke for Figure 9.2.1.-2:  SAMSON Type 3277 for integral positioner attachment

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 007 of 292

9.2.1.1  Forces in valve and actuator Fa FSE

FRa Fp

FR FSF

FM

F∆p Figure 9.2.1.1.-1:  Valve Type 3241 with pneumatic actuator Type 3271

The following forces act upon the throttle trim including the plug stem: „„ Actuator force: „„ Friction force: „„ Inertial force: „„ Flow force: „„ Sealing force:

F a F R F M F∆p FSF

(or actuator torque Ma) (stem seal, possibly pressure balance seal) (force due to weight of plug, force due to acceleration) (due to the shut-off pressure) (seat loading force) when valve is closed)

Residual forces are present on the actuator stem in the pneumatic actuator: „„ Actuator force: Fa (or actuator torque Ma) „„ Friction force: FRa (negligible (0) however) „„ Inertial force: FM (force due to weight, force due to acceleration) „„ Elastic force: FSE (due to the springs elasticity) „„ Pressure force: FP (Fp = Pst ∙ A) (signal pressure pst, diaphragm area A)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 008 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Signal pressure pst

4

5

Spring pressure

1.1

1

6

6.1

3

7

1 1.1 2 3 4

8 12

a

Nut Nut Actuator stem Vent plug Loading pressure 9 connection 5 Top diaphragm 2 case 6 Springs 7 Diaphragm plate 8 Diaphragm 9 Nuts and bolts 10 Yoke with bottom diaphragm case 11 Loading pressure connection 12 Stem seal 12.1Dry bearing 13 Wiper 15 Ring nut 16 Stem connector

12.1 11 10 12.1

Dimension a 350 cm² = 209 mm 700 cm² = 246 mm

15 13 16

Travel

Figure 9.2.1.-2:  Sectional diagram of Type 3277 with 240, 350, and 700 cm2 effective diaphragm area

The Type 3277 pneumatic actuators with an effective diaphragm area of 240, 350 or 700 cm2 are primarily mounted to control valves from the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280. The actuator is made up of two diaphragm cases, a rolling diaphragm and springs. The lower diaphragm case is permanently fixed to the yoke which allows the direct attachment of either a pneumatic or electropneumatic positioner or a limit switch. The signal pressure creates a force at the diaphragm surface which is balanced by the springs (6) arranged in the actuator. The number of springs and their compression determine the bench range (signal pressure range) while taking the rated travel into account which is directly proportional to the signal pressure. A maximum of 30 springs can be installed, partly fitted inside one another. The stem connector (16) connects the actuator stem (2) with the plug stem of the control valve.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 009 of 292

The self contained, spring-opposed pressure governor which was introduced decades ago and initiated the beginning of automation in process industries was the real predecessor of the contemporary pneumatic diaphragm actuator. Modern pneumatic diaphragm actuators developed from them over the course of the years. An essential break through happened with the introduction of high-strength fabrics of polyamide or polyester and oil and wear & tear resistant synthetic rubber. Both materials make a firm bonding via a specific vulcanization process and this guarantees the long service life of the diaphragm. Pneumatic diaphragm actuators compare the input signal, which affects the diaphragm,with the compression force from one or several return springs. Through a linear relationship between actuator travel and trailing force this also results also in a proportionality between actuator input signal and actuator travel. If one presupposes a linear valve characteristic and a constant differential pressure a proportionality also exists between the controller output signal and the process variable, i.e. the flow rate. Because of this feature, the pneumatic diaphragm actuator soon found wide-spread distribution. Another advantage of this simple and robust principle is the possibility of avoiding the use of a valve positioner, if it cannot be justified for economic reasons or in cases of extremely harsh environmental conditions. Advantages: „„ Compact, only few parts required, very reliable. „„ High actuator thrusts at low air supply pressures (< 6 bar). „„ Proportional behavior via one or several return springs. „„ Simple reversal on site possible (direct or reverse). „„ Automatic failure position in case of auxiliary power loss. „„ Low hysteresis and excellent sensitivity. „„ Very broad application range (-35 °C to 90 °C NBR; -50 °C to +120 °C EPDM), lower temperatures with special diaphragm material on request. „„ Relatively immune to shock and vibrations. „„ Mounting in any position possible. „„ High internal tightness allows “interlocking” for several hours. „„ Lowest thrust-weight ratio of all actuators. „„ Best cost/thrust ratio of all actuator types. Disadvantages: „„ Limited valve travel (to approx. 1/8 of the diaphragm diameter) „„ Unsuitable for high supply pressures (> 6 bar).

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 010 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.2.  Lay-out of a suitable valve actuator The lay-out of a suitable control valve actuator requires that we consider a great number of parameters. The actuator indeed works only in an optimal manner, if both the process and environmental conditions as well as the corresponding characteristics and requirement profiles are exactly known. Based on this information, a calculation of the required actuator thrust (or torque) can be made and a suitable actuator selected. This depends in the first place on the main criteria: required actuator thrust, stroking speed and failure position. In addition to these main parameters, there are a number of further actuating variables, which have additionally to be considered during the calculation and specification of a suitable actuator. The following parameters and conditions are noted without suggesting that the list is definitive: „„ Type of movement (linear or rotational). „„ Transient response (proportional or integral). „„ Action of movement (direct or reverse). „„ Failure position in case of auxiliary power loss: (Open, Closed, Hold). „„ Actuator signal (electrical or pneumatic). „„ Input signal range (e.g. 4 to 20 mA). „„ Nominal travel or nominal angle of rotation. „„ Mounting interface between valve and actuator. „„ Required actuator thrust with closed valve. „„ Required actuator thrust with open valve. „„ Required travel rigidity (stiffness) for a stable control service. „„ Permissible accuracy deviation from the characteristic curve. „„ Hysteresis, reversal error and sensitivity. „„ Regulating time for full stroke travel or angle of rotation. „„ Switching frequency (on time in percent for of electric actuators). „„ Actuator volume (in case of pneumatic actuator). „„ Time constant and corner frequency (with positioner). „„ Resistance against shock and vibration (fatigue strength of actuator). „„ Permissible ambient temperatures. „„ Required protection class (against dust, water, moisture, e.g. IP65). „„ Requirements with regard to corrosion resistance. „„ Actuator and all accessories like positioners, boosters, solenoid valves and air supply pressure reduction device need proper air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 Class 4 regarding micro-parts ( 1.0 < d < 5 μm; < 1000 parts/m3) and Class 3 (≤ 1 mg/m3) regarding oil contamination otherwise filter systems are needed to protect each device. „„ Required auxiliary energy for actuator (e.g. min. and max. pressure). „„ Typical characteristics (e.g. effective diaphragm area). „„ Actuator connections (e.g. G⅛ to G1 or ⅛ to 1 NPT). „„ Repeatability of positioning taking into account:

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 011 of 292

◊  Ambient temperature. ◊  Auxiliary energy. ◊  Process conditions. „„ Other requirements, e.g. manual operation required for emergency situations? Therefore the user of valve actuators should prepare a “check list”, which contains all the important requirements and limiting conditions before he begins to specify the actuator. By this method it is ensured that all required functions have been considered, and an optimal actuator type for the respective task can be selected.

9.2.3.  Required actuator thrust for globe valves The fluid causes static and dynamic reaction forces which act on the plug and which must be absorbed, to a large extent, by the valve actuator. Static forces occur only with the valve closed i.e. if the flow is zero. In this case the internal pressure of the fluid attempts - in the normal flow direction - to open the valve and push the valve stem outwards. Dynamic forces result from heavy turbulence of the fluid. These forces cause vibrations and oscillations which often lead to early wear and tear in the valve or even failure of specific valve and/or actuator parts. Static forces of a globe valve A final control element, as represented schematically in Figure 9.2.3.-1, with a flow direction against the plug from below, tends to open, since the fluid pressure tries to push the plug upwards against the thrust of the actuator. This flow direction has been proven to be most effective and is used, in particular, with spring opposed pneumatic diaphragm actuators which have normally only limited travel rigidity. With a reversed flow, i.e. „flow-toclose“, instability might occur as will be demonstrated later. The total static thrust required in order to close a globe valve against the actual pressure differential, results from the sum of the individual force components which is briefly explained below. The necessary equations for a detailed calculation, the symbols and common units are shown. Flow force F∆p Assuming a normal flow direction from below against the plug (Figure 9.2.3.-1), the flow force can be computed if inlet pressure and outlet pressure as well as the characteristic values of the final control element are known. This is firstly the cross-sectional area of the valve seat and stem. For valves with bellows seal its mean diameter should be used. Since the cross-section of the seat ring is usually large compared to the stem crosssection, the flow force increases approx. proportionally with the differential pressure. Sealing force FSF (Closing force) Today one expects from a final control element not only a good rangeability, but often also tight shut-off capabilities are required. The permissible leakage is defined in accordance with IEC-60534-4, where different leakage classes apply (II to VI). A correct lay-out of a suitable actuator requires not only a compensation of the flow force which results from the differential pressure in the closed position, but beyond there this a considerable closing force with which the plug must be pressed into the valve seat required, in order to achieve

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 012 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

the specified leakage rate or tight shut-off. As experience shows, a leakage-dependent specific seating force is required (per millimeter seat ring circumference) in order to enable satisfactory tightness. This means that the required closing force is approximately proportional to the seat ring diameter.

Fa

Sd

FR

FSF F∆p Sb

Figure 9.2.3.-1:  Static forces acting on a globe valve (schematic)

Friction force FR Most control valves still use a “stuffing box” which is required for the sealing of the valve stem (shaft), PTFE and graphite, which are often combined with special filling materials in order to improve hysteresis and sensitivity, are the most common package materials used today. Friction in the stuffing box can be roughly computed if the stem diameter d, the maximum pressure p and the package type are known. Generally, the frictional force increases proportionally with the stem diameter and the working pressure. A special packing coefficient is associated with the packing material.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 013 of 292

Friction force FRB in pressure balanced valves The principle of pressure balance is often applied on large valve sizes and high differential pressures. As a result, the actuator thrusts remains small in comparison with a nonpressure balanced control valve. The causes of friction are dynamic forces, which result mainly from the gap flow in the guide bushing and which press the plug firmly against the wall of the guide bushing. It is therefore erroneous to assume that pressure balanced valves require only very small actuator thrusts. These frictional forces in fact increase proportionally with the diameter of the guide bushing and with the differential pressure. Additional piston rings, which are often inserted in the plug to keep the leakage low, make things worse. Ignoring this frictional force is sometimes the reason why the final control element is unable to close, since the differential pressure normally increases with a decreasing flow, so that the friction force becomes highest near the closed position. The jamming effect is especially troublesome strongly with fluids which have no lubrication features e.g. like dry overheated steam or other dry gases. The pressure balance contoured plug seat configuration of SAMSON AG has not been changed to the non pressure balanced standard trim. The unique balanced design -see Chapter 6 Fig. 6.2.4.-3 – is sealed in the valve bonnet and not in the seat area, Therefore the risk of jamming is minimized as well as the high dirt sensitiveness known from other cage retained pressure balanced systems. Weight force FM In a case of a very heavy opturator (plug) with a considerable mass, emphasis must naturally give also to the weight of the plug (depending on the mounting position of the control valve), if the actuator has to be able to open or close the final control element against gravity forces. 9.2.4.  Dynamic forces need to be considered in case of flow to close tendencies When considering static forces, the main factors apply to the valve in the closed position, i.e. the actuator must be able to close the valve against the highest differential pressure, On the other hand, an accurate and stable control service should be achieved for pressure balanced and/or double seated valves, in spite of low actuator forces and a relatively small travel stiffness when dynamic forces exist. Provided a comprehensive actuator calculation for a single seated control valve has been carried out, and that it considers all essential factors, the dynamic forces can usually be ignored because static forces normally predominate to a great extent. A different situation exists, however, in the case of a double seated or pressure balanced control valve. Here the dynamic forces can considerably exceed the static forces. This means that unstable regulating service and/or inadequate control characteristics might occur. The regulation service becomes particularly critical if with “direct action”, the installed characteristic of the pneumatic diaphragm actuator flattens so far that different travel positions can be assigned to the same actuator input signal (Figure 9.2.4.-1). This effect can be observed with control valves with a flow direction „to close“, i.e. the flow enters the valve from entry point on top of the plug. This misapplication often results in

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 014 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

an uncertain correlation between the actuator input signal and the corresponding valve travel and should be avoided under all circumstances. While the signal range of the actuator becomes greater with the normal flow direction „to open“ (approx. 160 % in Figure 9.2.4.-1), the signal range decreases in the case of re-verse flow direction (approx. 65 %) and this might cause instability. Considerable instability is often found near the closed position but rarely also instability can be found at opening position if here the total signal pressure characteristic SB turns negative (see Figure 9.2.4.-2 and Figure 9.2.4.-3). The plug usually “flutters” in this range and not only prevents a stable regulation, but also tends to self-destruction through “hammer effects”. The dynamic forces acting on the internals of the control valve can be greatly suppressed, if an actuator with sufficient rigidity (travel stiffness) is employed, Unlike self-locking electro actuators or very “inflexible” electro hydraulics actuators, pneumatic diaphragm actuators have only a limited stiffness, which is determined by the spring rate of the return spring(s). Empirically based findings prove that a satisfactory regulation can be expected even in the case of limited travel stiffness. Naturally, the requirements increase with an increasing differential pressure and with a larger diameter of plug. A re-calculation of the required minimum travel stiffness is recommended, if (1) high differential pressures occur, (2) the valve is pressure balanced, (3) the flow direction is reverse (flow-to-open). Since the user very seldom knows the precise physical dimensions in the case of an installed valve, the actual flow coefficient (Cv100 value) can also be used in a rough calculation. In addition, a valve specific stability factor may be utilized in order to observe the dynamic behavior of the valve depending on the trim. Cage and contoured plug valves, for instance, behave more favorably in this respect than do valves with parabolic plugs. Signal range (bar) 1.8

Resulting force of fluid and spring for ATC

1.6 1.4 1.2

Flo

wd

1.0

Benc

0.8

ctio

nF

h ran ge

Flow dir

0.6 0.4

ire

TO

ection F

TC

instable

0.2 0 10 Valve closed

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 % Valve open

Figure 9.2.4.-1:  Characteristics of a pneumatic diaphragm actuator at different flow directions (schematic)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 015 of 292

pst Safe control range

Y

w

SB

Dynamic Joukowsky peak „Water hammer“

x

SB

p

1

Sz

S0

Fluid force

p2 0.45 pst0

FTC + ATO

Sz

 ∆p100  f   ∆p0  pst100

Spring force

 ∆p100  f   ∆p0 

Travel

Signal pressure - Travel diagram with non-stable signal pressure characteristic SB if the slope (gain) turns negative (-) to the positive (+) spring slope. Risk of hunting (hammering) at small opening < 20 % travel and also possible oscillation (hunting) at > 35 % travel if ∆pmax 70°

SB

2

pst open

pst close

n dy

.

±S

ཱ pst0· MA

s

ta

10°

(- )

t. 20°

30°

40°

S

50°

60°

70°

80°

90°

Opening angle

Signal pressure - opening diagram ATO (Closed with spring force) S0 Spring characteristic (±) ML= friction (break off) torque (against direction of travel) (±) MSt = Shaft sealing torque (against direction of travel) (-) Mdyn = dynamic torque f(size, ∆p) (closing direction) SB1, SB2 Signal pressure characteristic to open and to close the rotary valve. Take care of the necessarily min. air supply and min. pre-load of the spring To check: ② pst0 ∙ MA > ML +MSt ③ (psu – pst100) ∙ MA > Mdyn. + MSt Figure 9.2.4.-5:  Signal pressure–opening diagram ATO

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 018 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

MA Torque pst

Min. air supply psu Fail safe: ATC (open by spring force)

psu - pst100 psu = 2∙pst100 ཰ SVWFORVH SB 2

pst100ཱ

SB

pst open

Instable opening for control > 70°

1

6  ≈

Break off torque

lin

ea

r

Min. spring pre-load torque

ིpst0

.

n dy

s 6

V

WD

10°

(- )

W 20°

30°

40°

S

50°

60°

70°

80°

90°

Opening angle

Signal pressure - opening diagram ATC (Closed with air pressure). The dynamic torque (-) Mdyn. in some applications like “flow machines anti-surge” control with high performance low noise butterfly valves can get much higher values than shown here in case of high ∆p at max. load. This closing torque need to be balanced safety with a necessarily spring pre-load torque. See sizing example To check: ① (psu – pst100) ∙ MA > ML + MSt ② pst00 ∙ MA > ML + MSt ③ pst0 ∙ MA > Mdyn. + MSt Figure 9.2.4.-6:  Signal pressure–opening diagram ATC

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 019 of 292

9.2.5.  Calculation and selection of an actuator For the selection of a suitable pneumatic diaphragm actuator, it is vital to work through the previously mentioned “check list”. The following questions, which have a decisive influence on the actuator selection procedure, are to be answered without fail in this respect: „„ Failure position: valve either closed or open? „„ Nominal valve travel: actuator travel must be ≥ valve travel. „„ Prescribed flow direction: flow to open or flow to close? „„ Important physical dimensions: seat and stem diameter? „„ Packing type: PTFE or graphite? „„ Flow coefficient (Cv100 value)? „„ Required actuator thrust in closed valve position? „„ Required minimum full stroke regulating time for nominal valve travel? „„ Is a positioner required? If not: required signal range? „„ Does the interface match the actuator and the control valve? „„ Minimum air supply pressure of the plant? „„ Supply air quality can have a major impact to safety functions. Filter systems are recommended for each devise to keep air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 in locations with lower standards. „„ Minimum and maximum ambient temperatures? „„ Required shock and/or vibration resistance? „„ Special requirements with respect to corrosion resistance? „„ Other demands of the customer? When all these items have been considered, a corresponding calculation and selection of a suitable valve actuator can be made. 9.2.5.1  General notes for the calculation and selection of actuators „„ A sufficient additional safety factor should always be planned, since an exact calculation of the required actuator thrust is quite complex and there could be a difference in the force balance from final inspection to after commissioning under process conditions as well as after long term operations. „„ For DIN/DVGW valves and other quick closing and safety control valves (TÜV certificated) the actuator safety factor must be about 2. „„ SAMSON Valve Sizing (SVS and SVSS) creates a general warning, if the safety factor become < 1.1. This min. safety factor expects ideal environmental condition like an in-house installation- and equates to the competitive conduct. „„ Environmental conditions at delivery and plant location are often unknown as well how long valves are stored before commissioning. Valves may be delivered in hazardous areas and stored less protected. Then sealing material will be attacked from rain, sand and petrochemical dust and sometimes it can take month before the plant is ready for start up. Any packing-stem system will suffering more under static not pressurized conditions.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 020 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

The valve system friction may increase also from lack in commissioning (pipe installation without force compensation due to temperature elongation). Long term age-hardening of packing and sealing material occurs in case of no proper frequently maintenance. It is recommended to use a higher than 1.1 safety factor in case of those unknown (not ideal) random conditions. Therefore the required actuator force (trust): Fo = 1.25 ∙ Fa „„ Large effective areas reduce the negative influence of friction forces on control valve performance by minimizing hysteresis and dead band. At request of the highest control controllability for expensive products like insulin also a low price actuator of smallest size may close against a moderate low shut down pressure. The valve performance and controllability interacting to the production quality and quantity, which significantly can improved with a larger actuator size selected in the first priority for lowest hysteresis and not for the shut down pressure. „„ Diaphragm actuators have a considerably smaller hysteresis than piston actuators (up to 40 % hysteresis due to piston seals), which the positioned is likely to be unable to compensate on long term. „„ Several spring assemblies with smaller springs distributed over the circumference offer a greater accuracy and mechanical stability than fewer large springs arranged in the center. In addition, the variability of the spring range and the stiffness of the actuator are increased „„ The actuator characteristic should, ideally, be linear and the hysteresis small. Linearity errors stem mostly from a changing diaphragm area which might possibly result in an inadequate actuator thrust in the closed position. The actuator selection should also consider durability and maintenance. „„ An application in the following climatic conditions should be guaranteed: ◊  Moderate ◊  Cold ◊  Dry warm ◊  Humid and warm „„ Constructional arrangement of the valve interface and general firmness of the actuator should meet all requirements considering at the same time ambient influences. Demands regarding earthquake safety and/or radiation resistance in nuclear power plants are examples of this point. „„ The selection of a suitable actuator should always consider possible future enhancements. Subsequent mounting of a hand wheel or positioner might be taken as examples. Mounting possibilities of further accessories should also be considered. „„ Fatigue strength and impact resistance ought to be considered e.g. as they occur on ships. „„ Corrosion-resistant paint coatings should be applied, in order to protect the actuator and guarantee the specified service life. „„ All aspects of accident safety must be considered, in order to protect users against injuries.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 021 of 292

„„ An adequate quality assurance system (ISO 9001) and attention paid to valid standards and regulations is necessary, to guarantee correct „state of the art“ products. 9.2.6.  Fail-safe action When the signal pressure fails, the fail-safe action of the actuator depends on whether the springs are installed in the top or bottom diaphragm chamber. Actuator stem extends (ATO) When the signal pressure is reduced or the air supply fails, the springs move the actuator stem downwards and close the valve. The valve opens when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force exerted by the springs. Actuator stem retracts (ATC) When the signal pressure is reduced or the air supply fails, the springs move the actuator stem upwards and open the valve. The valve closes when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force exerted by the springs. pst

pst = Signalpressure

pst

Black arrow = Spring force Blue arrow = Air pressure

ATC

ATO

pst

pst

pst

FTC + ATC

pst

FTC + ATO

FTO + ATC

Figure 9.2.6.-1:  Fail-safe action

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

FTO + ATO

Page 022 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.6.1  Major application cases One must distinguish between the following application cases before beginning the relevant calculation procedure: „„ (a) Valve without pressure balance, FTO flow direction to open, ATO (air failure→spring CLOSED). „„ (b) Valve without pressure balance, FTO flow direction to open, ATC (air failure→spring OPEN). „„ (c) Valve with pressure balance, FTO flow direction to open, ATO (air failure→spring CLOSED). „„ (d) Valve with pressure balance, FTO flow direction to open, ATC (air failure →spring OPEN). „„ (e) Valve without pressure balance, FTC flow direction to close, ATO (air failure→spring CLOSED. „„ (f) Valve with pressure balance, FTC flow direction to close, ATO (air failure→spring CLOSED. „„ (g) Valve with - or without pressure balance, FTC flow direction to close, ATC (air failure→spring OPEN. The application mentioned under (g), i.e. valve with - or without pressure balance, flow direction to close and valve on air failure OPEN, must be avoided, because full stability can hardly be expected under these conditions (see Figure 9.2.4.-1). The required effective area of the actuator diaphragm and therefore the required actuator size is derived from the previously calculated actuator thrust. It is always recommended to add an additional safety factor of approx. 1.25 in order to ensure that the actuator is able to close the final control element, under all conditions, against the max. upstream pressure p1 or against the specified max. differential pressure ∆pA. The following equations consider the relationships between actuator and valve in the different application examples.

9.2.6.2  Flow force Depending to the customer specification ∆p is declared as ∆pA; ∆p0 or p1 max. For actuator sizing this value has the highest cost influence and must be clarified before starting the offer. Without pressure balance trim: FTO flow to open Flow force F∆p = trust is opening (+) and need Fa trust to close (-)

π F =  Sb2 ⋅ ∆p + Sd2 ⋅ p2  ⋅ ∆p   4 ⋅ 10

(

) (

)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

(9-1)

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 023 of 292

If in the majority of trim variations the seat diameter Sb is essential larger than the stem – or bellows seal diameter Sd the influence of Sd is negligible.

F= ∆p

(S

b

2

)

⋅ ∆p ⋅

π

Sb >> Sd

4 ⋅ 10

(9-1.2.1)

FTC flow to close F∆p trust is closing (-) and need Fa trust to open (+)

π F =  Sb2 − Sd2 ⋅ ∆p − Sd2 ⋅ p2  ⋅ ∆p   4 ⋅ 10

(

)

(

)

(9-1.2.2)

The term for the closing force F∆p = (Sb2 – Sd2) ∙ ∆p ∙ π/(4 ∙ 10) need to have a force correction for the open position with factor f: f = 0 if Δp100/Δp0 tends to zero; f = 0.4 if Δp100/Δp0 tends to 1 f = 0.4 based on measurements with parabolic plugs (mentioned in VDI/VDE 3844) Remark: F∆p at open position = F∆p ∙ f With Pressure balance trim: FTO flow to open: (Standard flow direction) F∆p and Fp1 trust result to open (+) and need Fa trust to close (-) In case of Da > Sb

 D 2 − S 2 ⋅ ∆p + S 2 ⋅ p  ⋅ π = F b d 1  ∆p  a 4 ⋅ 10

(

)

(

)

(9-1.3.1)

In case of Da = Sb (Standard for SAMSON pressure balance)

Fp1 = Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π

(9-1.3.2)

4 ⋅ 10

FTC flow to close (on request for an angle type valve) F∆p and Fp1 trust result to close (-) and need Fa trust to open (+) In case of Da > Sb

π F =  Da2 − Sb2 ⋅ ∆p − Sd2 ⋅ p1  ⋅ ∆p   4 ⋅ 10

(

)

(

)

(9-1.4.1)

In case of Da = Sb (Standard for SAMSON pressure balance)

Fp1 = Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

(9-1.4.2)

Page 024 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.6.3  Sealing, friction and other forces Sealing force FSF if valve closed H = 0 (9-2)

FSF = π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb f2 = for required leakage class N/mm Metallic Lapped in Soft sealing Packing/Sealing friction FR without pressure balance

2 20 0.3

Class IV Class V Class VI

FR =± π ⋅ f1 ⋅ Sd

(9-3)

Stem seal → Friction coefficient f1 N/mm 3240

Series

3250

DN up to 150

Packing number PTFE- packing Graphite-packing Bellows Insulated section Univerdit Alchem

1 1.6 5 1.6 1.6 3.2

DN > 150 2 3.2 10

2 3.2 10 1.6 1.6 3.2

Figure 9.2.6.3.-1:  Stem seal → Friction coefficient f1

Friction in pressure balanced valves

FRB = π ⋅ f3 ⋅ Da

(9-4)

Stem seal → Friction coefficient f3 N/mm With PTFE seal 3.0 With Graphite seal 10 Weight force of plug and actuator stem system

FM =± M ⋅ g

(9-5)

Remark: - M normal installation; + M reverse hanging installation M = Mass of plug and actuator stem system g = Gravity acceleration g = 9.81 m/s2 Of interest only at larger sizes: DN 200 approximately 200 N DN 300 approximately 450 N Weight forces (FM) for small sizes are negligible. In this way, the following basic equations will apply for the calculation of the required actuator thrust considering the valve type, the flow direction and the respective failure position of the final control element:

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 025 of 292

9.2.6.4  Actuator force Fa in all cases of (a) to (f) Chapter 9.2.6.1 Actuator force Fa Case (a) and case (b): No pressure balance, flow to open, failure position: ATC - OPEN or ATO - CLOSED,

Fa = F∆p + FSF + FR + (FM)

(9-6)

From the variables of equation (9-1) equation (9-2) equation (9-3) we get:

 S 2 ⋅ ∆p + S 2 ⋅ p  ⋅ π + π ⋅ f ⋅ S + π ⋅ f ⋅ S + M ⋅ g (9-6.1) = F a d 2  2 B 1 d  b 4 ⋅ 10

(

) (

)

Case (c) and case (d): With pressure balance, flow to open, failure position OPEN or CLOSED

Fa = Fp1 + FSF + FR + FRB + (FM)

F= a

(S

d

2

)

⋅ p1 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

+ π ⋅ (f2 ⋅ SB + f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) + M ⋅ g

(9-7) (9-7.1)

Case (e): No pressure balance, flow to close, failure position CLOSED

Fa = F∆p + FR + (FM )

(9-8)

π + π ⋅ f1 ⋅ Sd + M ⋅ g Fa =  Sb2 − Sd2 ⋅ ∆p − Sd2 ⋅ p2  ⋅   4 ⋅ 10

(

)

(

)

(9-8.1)

If Sb >> Sd equation (9-8.1) could be simplified:

= Fa

(S

b

2

)

− Sd2 ⋅ ∆p ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

+ M⋅ g

(9-8.2)

Fa trust here is needed to open the valve from 0 to 100 % travel. Important to check the actuator stiffness for control stability with equation (9-10) and check the closing position if the closing pressure differential is too small.

10 ⋅ pst0 ⋅ A > FSF + FR = π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ f1 ⋅ Sd

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 026 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Case (f): With pressure balance, flow to close, failure position CLOSED

Fa = Fp1 + FR + FRB + (FM)

(9-9)

in case of Sb = Da

Fa= Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

+ π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) + M ⋅ g

(9-9.1)

Fa trust here is needed to open the valve from 0 to 100% travel. Important to check the actuator stiffness for control stability with equation (9-10) and check the closing position if the closing pressure differential is too small.

10 ⋅ pst0 ⋅ A > FSF + FRB =π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) With a reverse flow direction (fluid tends to close the valve), the plug is pressed into the seat by the differential pressure. This application should be limited to special cases only, in order to avoid instability with fine control requirements. A few exceptions are applications where it is either favorable „„ To exploit the reaction force of the differential pressure for secure closing of the valve and/or to achieve tight shut-off, or „„ To limit wear and tear inside the valve body caused - in the case of angle type valves - by erosion or/and abrasion. One main criterion for achieving adequate actuator stability is the difference of force gradients, when a reverse flow direction is chosen. Generally there exists in every travel position of the actuator, a balance between the actuator thrust which is determined by the effective diaphragm area multiplied by the actuator input signal and the trailing force of the return spring(s). Under dynamic conditions high fluid forces can occur, which act on the plug and considerably disturb this balance. From Figure 9.2.4.-1 it becomes clear, that the effective signal range in the case of “direct action” and a flow direction „to close“ is considerably decreased which leads, unavoidably, to instability, since the force gradient resulting from fluid forces is higher that of the return spring(s). This makes, in such a case, a satisfactory regulation impossible. For this reason, the combination („direct action“ and „flow to close“ service) should be excluded under all circumstances. However, the flow direction „to close“ is even with “reverse action” (valve closed in case of air failure) not without problems. Near the closed position the reaction forces of the control valve normally increase greatly and may be superposed by a so called “Joukowsky peak” at larger sizes, long upstream pipe and high pipe velocity, so that the force balance is suddenly disturbed considerably. This imbalance can be slightly improved by the application of a positioner. The response time is, however, not fast enough by far, so that a continuous “hammering” of the plug might occur near the closed position.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 027 of 292

This must be in all circumstances avoided for wear and tear reasons. Essential for stable actuator operation is a sufficiently high spring rate whose force gradient must be higher at any travel position than the force gradient resulting from dynamic valve reaction forces. Furthermore, it should be noted that the actuator force direction of flow „to close“ applications is reverse, i.e. the actuator force hat to “pull” the plug out of the seat. One should further differentiate between “control service” and “ON-OFF service. In the latter case, a continuous “hammering effect” cannot occur, since the critical range is usually passed through very quickly. Important with reverse flow conditions is an examination of the required actuator rigidity or travel stiffness, in order to assure a stable control service. This stiffness depends on the spring rate and the diaphragm area of the pneumatic actuator: A ∙ (pst100 - pst0). Adequate control stability can be expected if the required maximum actuator thrust is in a certain relationship to the signal range of the actuator. The required signal range which, in turn, determines the travel stiffness can be roughly checked by means of the following equations. The disadvantageous case that the valve authority ∆p100/∆p0 tends to zero, (means ∆pqmax 2 ⋅ F∆p

F= ∆p

(S

b

2

)

− Sd2 ⋅ ∆p0 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

(9-10) (9-10.1)

for cases Sd 0.016 ⋅ Sb 2 ⋅ ∆p0

(9-10.2)

A ⋅ (pst100 − pst0 ) ⋅ 10 > 2 ⋅ Fp1

(9-10.3)

With pressure balance:

Fp1 = Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

(9-10.4)

In case of Da = Sb (Standard for SAMSON pressure balance. The factor 2 in equation (9-10) tends to factor 1 if the valve authority ∆p100/∆p0 also tends from 0 to 1. ∆p0 roughly can be substitute with the max. ∆p at qmin. but not with the specified ∆pA for actuator closing, which could be much higher than ∆p0. Control actions are not recommended below 20 % travel. 1 Lean on VDI 3844 draft 2010-05

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 028 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

For ON-OFF service the following rule applies for FTC

A ⋅ (pst100 − pst0 ) ⋅ 10 > 1.33 ⋅ F∆p

(9-11)

Based on long term experience with perforated plugs (FTC) a proven rule-of-thumb for the maximum permissible differential pressure ∆p0 has been derived from equation 9-10 and 9-11 for applications with a flow direction to close. ∆p0 roughly can be substitute with the max. ∆p at qmin. but not with the specified ∆pA for actuator closing, which could be much higher than ∆p0. For control service:

∆p0= 0.5 ⋅ A ⋅ (pst100 − pst0 ) ⋅ 4 ⋅

(

100

)

Sb2 − Sd2 ⋅ π

(9-12)

The factor 0.5 tends to factor 1 if the valve authority Δp100/Δp0 also tends from 0 to 1. For ON-OFF service:

0.75 ⋅ A ⋅ (pst100 − pst0 ) ⋅ 4 ⋅ ∆p= 0

(S

b

100 2

)

− S d2 ⋅ π

(9-13)

9.2.6.5  Safety factors to actuator sizing Important requirements and safety factors to actuator sizing published in SAMSON VALVE SIZING SVS and SVSS.

Figure 9.2.6.5.-1:  SAMSON Actuator sizing

„„ Fa : delivered actuator trust „„ Foreq. : Required actuator trust „„ Fmreq. : Required actuator trust (Pressure balanced) „„ Fmax. : Actuator trust: Max. allowed trust depends to max. temperature „„ ∆pmax. : Allowed ∆p depends to the chosen actuator and strength of the stem „„ ps0req. : Min. required pre-load spring force pst0 for fail safe ATO „„ ∆pS : min. required air supply – pst100 for fail safe ATC To check in case of pressure balance trim: ∆pS: min. req. Air supply – pst100 for full opening ATO bar

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

kN kN kN kN bar bar bar

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 029 of 292

Handling safety factors SF: Safety factor SF delivered actuator trust / required actuator trust. The factor SF is the result of selecting the actuator type (e.g. actuator data sheet information from Chapter 9.2.22 to Chapter 9.2.22.2 with higher trust than calculated. The responsible engineer should have information about environment, installation, local maintenance and warrantee conditions as well as special customer requirements. See also Chapter 9.2.5.1. If this random conditions are critical it is recommended to size SF higher than 1.1 (SVSS software warning value). If 1.1 < SF < 1.25 select an actuator type with SF equal or near to 1.25. (Is the SVSS software warning 2.0 than select near to 2.0) Fa/Fo or Fa/Fm without or with pressure balance warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1 → recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25 Open safety factor: only for fail safe ATC Ff /Fw warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 2.0 Ff = pst0 = pre-load spring trust, Fw = system friction

9.2.6.6  Calculation examples (pressure balance): Fp1 forces can support to open (FTO) or to close (FTC) the valve. In case of pressure balance this forces are small in comparison to the total system friction forces

Fw =FR + FRB + c

Flow to open FTO Fail safe ATO Closing safety factor:

Fa = Fm

Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

A ⋅ pst0 ⋅ 10 + π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da )

Opening safety factor:

A ⋅ (psu − pst100 ) ⋅ 10 Fa = π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) Fm Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1 recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 030 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Flow to open FTO Fail safe ATC Closing safety factor:

Fa = Fm

Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅

π

A ⋅ (psu − pst100 ) ⋅ 10

4 ⋅ 10

+ π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da )

Open safety factor:

Fa A ⋅ pst0 ⋅ 10 = Fm π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da )

Flow to close FTC: From safety point of view a specified high shut down pressure ∆pA should only be used to check the valve and trim-stem system material strength values. In many applications ∆pA could decrease to smaller values at least to atmosphere after the valve is closed. The required seat tightness quality (e.g. Class V) should stay under all ∆p conditions. Flow to close FTC Fail safe ATO Closing safety factor:

Fa A ⋅ pst0 ⋅ 10 = Fm π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) Opening safety factor:

A ⋅ (psu − pst100 ) ⋅ 10 Fa = Fm Fp1 + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) The term

Fp1= Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅ f ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible f = 0 if ∆p100/∆p0 tends to zero; f = 0.4 if ∆p100/∆p0 tends to 1 Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1 recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Flow to close FTC Fail safe ATC Closing safety factor:

Page 031 of 292

A ⋅ (psu − pst100 ) ⋅ 10 Fa = Fm π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da )

Open safety factor:

Fa A ⋅ pst0 ⋅ 10 = Fm Fp1 + π ⋅ ( f1 ⋅ Sd + f3 ⋅ Da ) The term

Fp1= Sd2 ⋅ p1 ⋅ f ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

in case of pressure balance is nearly negligible f = 0 if ∆p100/∆p0 tends to zero; f = 0.4 if ∆p100/∆p0 tends to 1. Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVS / SVSS if SF < 1.1 recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25 Calculation example without pressure balance: Same method than above but delete f3 ∙ Da and replace Fp1 trust with F∆p trust equations without pressure balance. Flow direction FTC Fail safe ATO Closing safety factor:

Fa A ⋅ pst0 ⋅ 10 = Fm π ⋅ f2 ⋅ Sb + π ⋅ f1 ⋅ Sd

Opening safety factor:

A ⋅ (psu − pst100 ) ⋅ 10 Fa = Fm F∆p ⋅ f + π ⋅ f1 ⋅ Sd

Warning in SAMSON Valve Sizing Specialist SVSS if SF < 1.1 recommended in hazardous areas = 1.25 The term for the closing force

F= ∆p

(S

b

2

)

− Sd2 ⋅ ∆p ⋅

π 4 ⋅ 10

Need to have a force correction for the open position with factor f: f = 0 if Δp100/Δp0 tends to zero; f = 0.4 if Δp100/Δp0 tends to 1 f = 0.4 based on measurements with parabolic plugs (mentioned in VDI/VDE 3844)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 032 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.6.7  Calculation of the Hysteresis: SAMSON VALVE SIZING SVSS specialist can check the hysteresis of the valve actuator system. A value which plays an important role for the total controllability. As a rule of thumb the hysteresis of a valve system without positioned should be < 5 % and with a positioner type of medium quality < 15%. For modern high quality positioners in the process industry SVSS the software generates a warning if the value is > 30%. = Hysteresis %

2 ⋅ Fw ⋅ 100 < 30 % 10 ⋅ A ⋅ (pst100 − pst0 )

(9-14)

If Hysteresis > 30% increase actuator stiffness: A ∙ (pst100 - pst0) More calculation examples are shown in Chapter 20 page 10 and page 26.

9.2.6.8  Required actuator torque for rotary valves The calculation procedure of the required actuator torque for control valves with rotary motion of 60 to 90 degree is less clear than that for globe valves. One reason is that the torque of rotary actuators does not always increase proportionally with the supply air pressure and/or the start point of the signal range in the case of reverse action. On the other hand, further factors must be included in calculations which do not occur in the calculations for globe valves. This means that the calculation procedure - compared to globe valves - is more complex. The differences become evident when considering ball valves. The governing variables for the required torque are the following: „„ Maximum differential pressure. „„ Mean diameter of sealing elements. „„ Friction coefficient between ball and sealing element. „„ External ball diameter. „„ Required contact pressure of the sealing rings. „„ Diameter of the thrust bearings. „„ Outer diameter of the trunnions. „„ Friction coefficient between bearings and trunnion. „„ Fluid factor (which influences friction). „„ Packing friction (dependent on packing material). „„ Break-off torque after long down-time. For other rotary type valves plays the bearing friction also a critical role in the determination of the required actuator thrust or torque. In the case of eccentric rotary valves additional factors have to be considered. The required torque e.g. depends besides friction and

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 033 of 292

breakaway forces on the inherent eccentricity. For these reasons it is not very practical to develop special equations with which the required torque can be exactly computed. Especially complicated relationships apply in the case of so-called rotary actuators, which often utilize an electric or pneumatic linear actuator and, in addition, a special gear or linkage to convert the linear motion into a rotation angle between 60° and 90°. For these designs not only the efficiency of the gear or linkage has to be taken into account, but also the required angle of rotation. In the case of the common double piston type, which uses a linear actuator and a special internal linkage, which is in turn firmly connected to the shaft of the rotary valve, the required torque is calculated taking into account the effective lever length and rotation angle. As experience has shown however, not only the minimum required torque, but also the maximum permissible torque must be computed in the case of rotary actuators in order to avoid deformation or damage of the valve shaft, which sustains the most frequent damages in chemical industry. The calculation of these actuator torques is solved most reliably by making use of corresponding computer programs which are based on manufacturer independent data bases. These consider all variables as listed by the respective manufacturer. If shaft diameters and materials are known, such a program can easily determine the maximum permissible actuator torque in order to avoid damage.

9.2.6.9  Actuator torque for standard butterfly valves For standard butterfly valves, the calculation of the required actuator torque is to some extent more clear so that as in practice proven calculation equations can be applies here. „„ Bearing friction torque „„ Friction torque in the stuffing box „„ Dynamic torque (see also Figure 9.2.4.-5 and Figure 9.2.4.-6) An additional safety factor is not needed for common fluids since the maximum occurring torque is already considered in the equation. The maximum friction torque of the bearing occurs naturally at the highest differential pressure in the closed-position, while the maximum dynamic torque occurs at an angle of approx. 70°, i.e. when the OPEN-position is achieved. This means that the two important main variables never do reach their peak values simultaneously. Nevertheless, this torque has been reasonably proven in practice for an actuator calculation and selection. In the case of very high temperatures or high viscous and sticky fluids an additional safety factor may be applied. Butterfly valves for control services need naturally more attention than those for ON-OFF services only. Simplified empirically equations for actuators which applies for standard butterfly valves are listed below. (It`s recommended to use this simplified method as a rule of thumb, if no product specific sizing method is available.)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 034 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Bearing friction torque of CLOSED-position (±)

ML ≅ 0.7 ⋅ dsd ⋅ DN2 ⋅ (p1 − p2 ) ⋅ 10−5

(9-15)

The torque direction (±) changes in case of the signal opens or closes the valve, which is known as break off torque. Stuffing box friction torque

Mst ≅ 10 ⋅ p1 ⋅ dsd3 ⋅ 10−5

(9-16)

This torque direction (±) also change against the moving direction and is responsible for the hysteresis. Max. dynamic torque at operating point qmax (-) 50 to 80 degree opening angle

Mdyn ≅ DN3 ⋅ (p1 − p2 ) ⋅ 10 −5

(9-17)

This torque always has the tendency to close the valve (-) and get it`s max. value between 50 and 80 degree opening. Depending to the ∆p versus flow characteristic ML or Mdyn or both torque need special care for actuator sizing. Total torque (required max. torque for actuator selection)

Mtotal_close ≅ ML + MSt

Mtotal_open ≅ Mdyn. + MSt

(9-18)

It makes only sense to sum up ML + MSt torques at closing position (break off torque) and Mdyn. + MSt torques at opening position where the max. dynamic torque is expected. Figure 9.2.4.-5 and Figure 9.2.4.-6 explain, that a proper actuator sizing need to look to all control actions like to open from the seat and to close to the specified leak rate requirements as well as to open to max load against the dynamic torque. In case of higher shut down pressure differentials the break off torque should be minimized with the help of enough actuator stiffness to ensure a large stable control range.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 035 of 292

Example: Severe service butterfly valve: DN 500; Shaft diameter 56 mm Cv100 = 6600, Fluid crude oil 20 °C qvmax operation condition: qv =5000 m3/h, p1 = 15 bara, p2 = 13 bara qvmin operation condition: qv =1000 m3/h, p1 = 15.5 bara, p2 = 11 bara Shut down condition at ∆pA = 16 bar ML ≅ 0.7 ∙ dSd ∙ DN2 ∙ (p1 - p2) ∙ 10-5 = 0.7 ∙ 56 ∙ 5002 ∙ 16 ∙ 10-5 = 1568 Nm MSt ≅ 10 ∙ p1 ∙ dSd3 ∙ 10-5 = 10 ∙ 15.5 ∙ 563 ∙ 10-5 = 272 Nm Mdyn ≅ DN3 ∙ (p1 - p2) ∙ 10-5 = 5003 ∙ 2 ∙ 10-5 = 2500 Nm To check: (See Figure 9.2.4.-6 with position ①,② and ③ for actuator sizing) ① (psu – pst100) ∙ MA > ML + MSt = 1890 Nm ② pst00 ∙ MA > ML + MSt = 1890 Nm ③ pst0 ∙ MA > Mdyn. + MSt = 2772 Nm The challenge is to select a rotary actuator with about 2772 Nm torque from pst0 ∙ MA, and (psu – pst100) ∙ MA > 1890 Nm and high stiffness spring bench rate to minimize the break off. It is recommended to use this simplified method as a rule of thumb, if no manufacturer specific sizing method is available. Butterfly valves and actuators today from concentric to triple-eccentric butterfly valves with different actuator types may deviate to this rule of thumb sizing and should be sized more precise from the responsible manufacturer. Such severe crude oil butterfly valves may operate in oil fields production and separation plants (upstream) with control actions at small pressure differential. Sometimes much higher shut down pressure differentials ∆pA are specified for start up or shut down or at least for an unexpected worse case condition. Take special care for the butterfly mechanical strength limits in case of very high static and/or dynamic torques. This type specific value (limit of seat and/or shaft load) may be published but must known in the R&D department of the manufacturer. Do not leave questions open, if this butterfly valve needs to do a start up or shut down to high ∆pA. Is the start up and shut down supported parallel connected with a bypass valve under split range control? Will the valve see the high ∆pA only under static closed condition or under dynamic flow condition? More about severe applications and split range control see chapter 11.7.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 036 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.7.  The main group of the pneumatic diaphragm linear actuators Type 3271 „„ Single-acting linear actuator „„ Diaphragm areas 80, 240, 350, 700, 1000, 1400, 2800 and 2 x 2800 cm2 „„ Rated travel 7.5, 15, 30, 60, 120 and 160 mm „„ Advantages: ◊  Inexpensive to manufacture ◊  Reliable ◊  Power and speed to fit most applications ◊  Easy to maintain ◊  Relatively light ◊  Fail-safe action easy to obtain ◊  Power source easy to generate ◊  Safe in explosion-hazardous areas Type 3277

„„ Single-acting linear actuator for integral positioner attachment „„ Diaphragm areas 120, 240, 355 and 700 cm2 „„ Nominal travel 7.5, 15 and 30 mm „„ Advantages of direct attachment: ◊  Exact and firm mechanical connection with positioner ◊  Shielded positioner feedback lever ◊  Single pneumatic connection between positioner and actuator „„ Additional features like Type 3271

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 037 of 292

Type 3271-52 „„ Single-acting linear actuator „„ Diaphragm area 60 cm2 Rated travel 7.5 mm „„ Advantages: ◊  Inexpensive to manufacture ◊  Reliable ◊  Power and speed to fit most applications ◊  Easy to maintain ◊  Relatively light ◊  Fail-safe action easy to obtain ◊  Power source easy to generate ◊  Safe in explosion-hazardous areas Type 3277-5

„„ Single-acting linear actuator for integral positioner attachment „„ Diaphragm area 120 cm2 „„ Nominal travel 7.5/15 mm „„ Advantages of direct attachment: ◊  Exact and firm mechanical connection with positioner ◊  Shielded positioner feedback lever ◊  Single pneumatic connection between positioner and actuator.

Table 9.2.7.-1:  The main groups of the pneumatic diaphragm actuators

Actuator Type 3271 and Type 3277 made of Stainless Steel Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 and 3277 made of stainless steel (240, 350, and 700 cm2) for special applications are in the SAMSON product range. These actuators are manufactured from the material WN 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9 ).

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 038 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.8.  Technical data for Packing and Plug stem diameter Packing and Plug stem diameter Packing Up to 220°C Up to 428°F

Type 3241 / 3251

220 to 350°C 428 to 662°F

PTFE-stuffing box without IT

3241 ( ≥ DN 200 (8")) / 3251 Graphite (H)-stuffing box without IT

350 to 500°C 662 to 932°F

Type 3241 / 3251

PTFE-stuffing box with IT

> 500°C > 932°F

Type 3251

Graphite (H)-stuffing box with IT

Plug stem diameter at Type 3241 DN 15 to 80

½" to 3"

10 mm

DN 100 to 150

4" to 6"

16 mm

> DN 150

> 8"

40 mm

Plug stem diameter at Type 3251 DN 15 to 40

½" to 1½"

12 mm

DN 50 to 100

2" to 4"

16 mm

DN 125 to 150

5" to 6"

25 mm

> DN 200

> 8"

40 mm

Table 9.2.8.1.-1:  Packing and Plug stem diameter

9.2.9.  Technical data for additional handwheel Version for actuator

Type 3271-5 Type 3277-5

Diaphragm area

120 cm2

Materials

Housing

Die-cast aluminum, powder-coated

Type 3271 Type 3277 2 240 cm , 350 cm2, 700 cm2 (only for initial spring value ≤ 2.1 bar) St 37-2, powder-coated

Stem

WN 1.4305

Stainless steel WN1.4104

Handwheel

Aluminum, powder-coated

Cast iron, powder-coated

Table 9.2.9.1.-1:  Technical data for additional handwheel

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 039 of 292

9.2.10.  Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop (With Type 3277 in special version only) The travel stop can be adjusted upwards or downwards to 50% of the travel. 1 2 3

4

5

6 7 Actuator stem retracts

Actuator stem extends

Downward travel stop (Actuator stem extends) „„ Undo the lock nut (4) and unscrew the cap (1). „„ Undo the lock nut (2) and adjust the nut (3) to set required travel stop. „„ Tighten the lock nut (2) again. Upward travel stop (Actuator stem retracts) „„ Undo the lock nut (4) and adjust the cap (1) to set the required travel stop. „„ Tighten the lock nut (4) again.

1 Cap (Cap position determines top travel limit) 2 Lock nut (determines bottom travel limit) 3 Nut 4 Lock nut 5 Top diaphragm case 6 Diaphragm plate 7 Actuator stem

Figure 9.2.10.-1:  The mechanical travel stop

Actuator with travel stop „„ Mechanically adjustable bidirectional travel stop „„ For actuator sizes 240, 350, 355, 700, 1000, 1400 and 2800 cm2 „„ Travel limitation up to 50 % in each direction „„ Additional features same as standard Type 3271 Figure 9.2.10.-2:  Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 with mechanical travel stop

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 040 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.11.  Manual operation Manual operation of the actuator is often required by the user in order to drive the valve into a desired position, either in the installation phase, or in case of auxiliary power loss. The particular demands of the purchaser have to be precisely considered. Clutches or blocking devices of a manually operated valve via a hand wheel are usually not wanted because they require, in the event of an emergency, additional effort and action from the user. This means that in the first instance a coupling or link with the actuator stem is necessary and then the blocking device has to be disconnected again. This additional operation increases the risk of a malfunction of the hand wheel and valuable time, in the event of an emergency, might be lost. Ideal hand wheels have to be set only in a neutral position which will not hinder the movement of the actuator stem during automatic operation. In cases however where a manual Figure 9.2.11.-1:  Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 with operation is required, a positioning handwheel of the actuator and the connected valve stem is easily possible for both directions (valve OPEN or CLOSED), without the need for additional steps or actions. The philosophy of manual operation equipment distinguishes between top-mounted Figure 9.2.11.-1 and side-mounted hand wheels. This should be clearly stated in the case of any order. Top-mounted hand wheels are normally simpler and cheaper than hand wheels mounted on the side. Disadvantageous of this design are mostly a higher operation thrust and less convenient accessibility to the hand wheel. Sometimes the user refuses pneumatic or electrical actuators completely, if only rare changes of the valve position are necessary but, nevertheless, a high rangeability and a clean characteristic curve is required. In such cases, precision manual operation should be selected. Since the operating thrusts to change the travel position of the actuator can be quite large with bigger valve sizes and with high differential pressures, worm gears are often employed (Figure 9.2.11.2.-1).

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 041 of 292

9.2.11.1  Pneumatic actuator Type 3277 with handwheel

17

Neutral position Pointer points to groove in coupling [22]

20 22

3

Vent plug

4

Loading press. connection

5

Top diaphragm case

6.1

Additional springs

7

Diaphragm plate

8 Diaphragm

23 24 25 3 4 5 6 7

8.1

Actuator stem

6 Springs

21

26 28 27

2

9

Nuts and bolts

10

Bottom diaphragm case

11

Loading press. connection

12

Stem seal

12.1 Dry bearing 13 Wiper 15

Ring nut

17 Handwheel

9

20

Lock nut

23

Clamping sleeve

8 21 Flange part 6.1 10 22 Coupling 2

11

16

24 Ring 25

Coupling nut

26

Threaded pin

27

Spindle with nut

Figure 9.2.11.1.-1:  Type 3277 Actuator with additional handwheel

Actuator with Handwheel Top mounted handwheel for actuator sizes:

240, 350, and 700 cm2 (only for initial spring value ≤ 2.1 bar)

Side mounted handwheel for actuator sizes: 1000, 1400, and 2800 cm2 Additional features same as standard Type 3271. Throttling or on / off service In throttling service, the pneumatic actuators can be used for supply pressures up to max. 6 bar. In on / off service, the supply pressure must be restricted. For fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts, the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 3 bar. (See Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Table 9.2.11.1.-2:  Actuator with Handwheel

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 042 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

For example: Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-7

Figure 9.2.11.1.-3:  Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-7 for Heat Transfer Oil with welding ends. Bellows seal, Handwheel, and Positioner Type 3730-X

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 043 of 292

9.2.11.2  Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 with side-mounted handwheel for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kN

Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 1400 and 2800 cm2 version for travel ≤ 60 to 160 mm, up to 150 kN

Figure 9.2.11.2.-1:  Hand-operated Actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 044 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.11.3  Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 attached to Type 3241 Valve Hand-operated actuator for attachment to valves, especially for Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm Nominal thrusts up to 32 kN. Spindle force versus manual force diagram Spindle force kN

Handwheel ∅ 250 mm Handwheel ∅ 180 mm

The Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator is a spindle actuator equipped with a non-rising handwheel. Special features „„ Low overall height „„ Simple connection to the control valve „„ Manual forces specified in DIN 3230, Part 2 „„ Locking mechanism securing the valve stem position against accidental adjustment „„ Replaceable with a pneumatic or electric actuator

Max. manual force acc. to DIN 3230

Fs 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

Technical data Type

FH 0

50

100 150 200 250 300 350 N 230 Manual force

3273-1

3273-2

Rated travel

mm

15 / 30

Maximum travel

mm

23 / 38

Maximum thrust

kN

18

32

Req. manual force

N

230

300

Max. temperature

°C

100

3

2 1

4 5

6

Figure 9.2.11.3.-1:  Type 3273 Handoperated Actuator attached to Type 3241

Figure 9.2.11.3.-2:  Sectional view Type 3273

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 045 of 292

9.2.12.  Actuator Selection with AC-Trim For Control Valves with AC-Trim it is important to note that over-travel with this trim is not possible. This is only achieved by using one of the following methods. „„ For valves with safety position CLOSED (Stem Extends) the springs should be selected with the maximum amount of pretension (example: for 15 mm valve travel with actuator diameter 350 cm2, nominal bench range 0.4 to 2.0 bar, the operating range 0.8 to 2.4 bar should be selected). „„ For valves with safety position OPEN (Stem Retracts) the beginning of the nominal bench range should be selected (example: for 15 mm valve travel with actuator diameter 700 cm2, nominal bench range 0.2 to 1.0 bar, the operating range 0.2 to 0.6 bar should be selected). This selection is important so that with larger actuator sizes the actuator force can be precisely set and the same time, the plug does not come completely out of the seat. Sectional view of AC-1 Trim

Sectional view of AC-2 Trim with four attenuation plates

Principle of operation The medium flows in the flow-to-open direction through the valve. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The Cv coefficient is adapted over the plug and, if necessary, using a combination of attenuation plates upstream of the seat. To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a second guide in the seat. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8083-1 EN. Figure 9.2.12.-1:  AC-Trims

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 046 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.13.  Control valves in case of fire An essential part of equipment safety is the fail-safe position to be maintained when a fire breaks out. In case of pneumatic linear actuators, the fail-safe position must be assumed and maintained when air supply fails or the diaphragm ruptures. Usually, springs are used to perform this task. They force the valve to move to the fail safe position when dangerous situations emerge or damages occur. The springs act against the pressure of the process medium to move the valve to the fail-safe position upon failure of air supply, and keep it in this position. When a fire breaks out, the fail-safe position of the pneumatic actuator will be negatively affected. The high temperatures cause the springs to lose their force. With time passing by and temperatures rising, the springs can no longer keep the valve in its failsafe position. In case of fail-safe action „Fail-close“, increasing leakage cannot be avoided. Figure 9.2.13.-2 shows how a pre loaded spring loses its force under the influence of temperature. Figure 9.2.13.-1:  Control valve with pneumatic actuator

T °C

800 tu r a r e

600

p m e T S pr i n

400

°C

gF orc e

N

200

0

5

10

15

20

25 Time min.

Figure 9.2.13.-2:  Force - temperature - time - diagram, loss of spring force

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 047 of 292

Shortly after the fire has broken out, the spring force decreases considerably. As a result, the ability to keep the valve in fail-safe position during the fire will be lost within a short period. The loss of rigidity and the considerable decrease of force are caused by re crystallization processes within the material structure of the spring. The use of conventional fire protection systems, such as coatings, do not provide decisive advantages since springs are moving components and subject to dynamic stress. Coatings cannot sufficiently retard the loss of force either. 9.2.13.1  Safety cartridge The problems discussed above were solved by developing a thermostatic system. This passive system was supposed to recognize non-typical temperature rises and respond to them actively. A quite simple element, a cartridge, was developed to perform this task. This cartridge consists of two cylinders sliding freely within each other. It is filled with intumescent material which can be composed in such a way that it determines the release temperature within certain boundaries and, of course, the increase in force it exerts.

+ Temperature

Initial state

F

After temprature increase

Figure 9.2.13.1.-1:  Schematic of safety cartridge

The cartridge is made up of a two-piece cylindrical case. The enclosed cylindrical chamber contains the intumescent material. This material is composed in a special way to ensure activation of the cartridge before the diaphragm of the pneumatic actuator is destroyed. The increase in volume causes the cylinders to move in opposing directions. During this process, considerable forces are developed. The operating direction of the cylinders corresponds to that of the springs, thus opposing their gradual loss in strength. Installed in actuators with safety equipment [5], these patented cartridges ensure decreasing spring force compensation. RESTRICTIONS Only at standard actuators and environmental temperatures up to 80 °C (degrees Celsius) and at the moment only to absorption area of 700 cm2 available.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 048 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Force N

5000

rt Ca

3000

rid

g

orce e in f s a e cr e in

1000 0

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Time min.

Figure 9.2.13.1.-2:  Force of the safety cartridge increasing over time; after heating in accordance with the unit-temperature curve

The safety cartridge is heated according to the unit-temperature curve in which the development of temperature over time is plotted in accordance with DIN 4102, Part 8 [6]. K

1000

500

Time min. 0

30

60

90

120

150

180

Figure 9.2.13.1.-3:  Unit-temperature curve

The design of this irreversibly operating cartridge is simple and allows retrofitting of already installed pneumatic actuators. To do this, the safety cartridge must be installed in the center of the actuator springs. The mounting position of the pneumatic actuator is not important, the cartridge can always perform its task of closing the valve in the event of a fire. The selected overall length of the cartridge does not affect the travel or operating range of the springs at standard ambient temperatures. Only in the event of a fire does the cartridge become effective, reacting to the unusually high temperatures.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 049 of 292

9.2.13.2  Fire-Safe / Fire lock

Figure 9.2.13.2.-1:  Safety cartridge in deactivated state

„„ Simple equipment or refitting „„ Fast and reliable reaction „„ Installation position independence „„ Working direction reversible

Figure 9.2.13.2.-2:  Safety cartridge after temperature increase.

The cartridge blocks the actuator in the desired safety position before the springs take damage. Valve remains opened or closed depending on function.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 050 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.13.3  Simulation of a fire A control valve equipped with such a safety cartridge was subjected to a simulated fire. Technical data of the control valve used in the simulation: Valve: „„ SAMSON, Type 3241, nominal size DN 25, nominal pressure PN 40 „„ Characteristic: equal percentage „„ Valve plug: lapped-in-metal „„ Plug material: Cr steel, WN 1.4006 „„ Seat material: Cr steel, WN 1.4006 „„ Body material: GS-C 25, WN 1.0619 Actuator: „„ SAMSON, Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator „„ Effective diaphragm area: 350 cm² „„ “Actuator stem extends” „„ Signal pressure range: 0.6 to 3 bar „„ Material: St 1203 „„ Diaphragm: NBR with polyester fabric The test aimed at maintaining the tightness of the valve over 30 minutes minimum with constant system pressure acting on the valve. The time span is based on the specifications given in BSI 6755/2 [7]. The test valve described above was heated in a test room according to the unit temperature curve. The pneumatic actuator was equipped with 6 cartridges installed in the actuator spring assemblies. The valve contained water. During the heating phase, steam was produced. A pressure regulator installed outside the test room maintained a constant system pressure of 30 bar. Prior to starting the test, a pump had been used to produce this pressure. Downstream of the seat/plug restriction area, the valve was open to atmosphere. The temperature in the test room and the pneumatic actuator was measured via thermocouples. The temperature increase over time in the test room and in the pneumatic actuator was correspondent to the unit-temperature curve (see Figure 9.2.13.1.-3). The system pressure of 30 bar in the valve upstream of the seat remained constant during the entire test procedure. As was expected, the rubber diaphragm was completely destroyed at the end of the test. With the exception of the springs, none of the metallic components showed any visible damages or deformations. The task, to provide tight shut-off against the pressure of 30 bar prevailing throughout the test and during the high temperatures of the fire, could be fulfilled over the entire period of temperature supply.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 051 of 292

9.2.13.4  Reversible operating direction Apart from the safety cartridges, there are additional solutions that can be integrated in the pneumatic actuator for safety. It is possible to use a pre loaded spring assembly released at an adjustable temperature to oppose the standard fail-safe position. This patented method [8] includes pre loaded spring discs which act in opposition to the standard actuator springs. The spring discs are bound by a solder strip. The type of solder determines at which temperature the spring discs are released to act as an additional safety device. Upon release of the spring discs, the standard fail-safe action is reversed. The solder joint is extremely stable under practical operating conditions, such as permanently increased ambient temperatures. A pneumatic actuator equipped with such a safety device is presented in the sectional drawing below.

Figure 9.2.13.4.-1:  Sectional drawing of a pneumatic actuator whose standard fail-safe action is reversed in the event of a fire. The release temperature range of the spring discs bound by a solder strip depends on the kind of solder used.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 052 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.13.5  Summary The safety equipment shows a simple structure, enabling the pneumatic control valve to assume fail-safe position or reverse this fail-safe position upon outbreak of fire. Pneumatic control valves could now be used in fields of application never considered possible before. Compared to pneumatic control valves with standard fail-safe action, actuators equipped with these innovative safety devices are able to maintain the fail-safe position over an extended period of time when exposed to fire. The safety cartridge filled with intumescent material plays an essential role in this safety technique. Thanks to these cartridges, the valve trim remains effective even at the extremely high temperatures of a fire, thus preventing leakage of hazardous media! The cartridges compensate for the loss in force of the springs, which under less extreme conditions guarantee fail-safe action. Another asset of the safety equipment is its cost-effectiveness compared to other safety equipment in use. Since the safety cartridges can replace more complex and hence expensive safety devices, they will prove to be another remedy against the pressure on costs. Alternatively, conventional fail-safe action can be reversed when a fire breaks out. Releasing pre loaded and bound spring discs reverses the direction of standard fail-safe action of pneumatic actuators. An important aspect in this innovative method is the fact that the temperature range in which the springs are released can be adjusted as needed. In view of all the advantages of the modern safety equipment developed by SAMSON, the use of pneumatic control valves could now be taken into consideration even where sensitive applications are concerned. Bibliography [1] Schneider, W. 1992. Der Metallbalg, ein zuverlässiges Dichtelement in Stellgeräten. In Chemietechnik, No. 3: 54-60 [2] Schneider, W., und Bartscher, H. 1988. Stellgeräte im Rütteltest. Chemie-Anlagen-Verfahren, No. 8: 84-90 [3] Kiesbauer, J., und H. Hoffmann 1998. Verbesserte Prozeßzuverlässigkeit und Wartung mittels digitaler Stellungsregler. Automatisierungstechnische Praxis, Vol 40, No. 2: 22-34 [4] Vogel, U. 1991. Trends in der Stellgeräteentwicklung. Chemie-Anlagen-Verfahren: 59-62 [5] SAMSON AG. 1994. Stellantrieb mit Sicherheitseinrichtung. Patentschrift DE 42 39 580 C2 [6] DIN 4102, Brandverhalten von Baustoffen und Bauteilen [7] BSI 6755/2, Testing of valves, Part 2 1987. Specification for fire type-testing requirements [8] SAMSON AG. 1997. Pneumatisch betätigbare Antriebseinheit. Patentschrift DE 196 49 440 C1

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 053 of 292

9.2.14.  Overview of actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5 up to a diaphragm area 120 cm2. Type 3271-52 3271-5 Diaphragm area 60 cm2 120 cm2 Rated travel 7.5 mm 7.5 mm

Linear actuators in particular for attachment to Micro-flow Valves Type 3510.

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

3271-52 60 cm2 7.5 mm

3271-5 120 cm2 15 mm

3277-5 120 cm2 15 mm

Linear actuators in particular for attachment to Valves Series 3240 and Micro-flow Valves Type 3510.

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

3271-5 120 cm2 15 mm

3277-5 120 cm2 15 mm

Version with Handwheel. Linear actuators in particular for attachment to Control Valves Series 3240 and Micro-flow Valves Type 3510. Figure 9.2.14.-1:  Linear actuators Type 3271-52, 3271-5, and 3277-5

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 054 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271-52 Diaphragm area 60 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 60 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 7.5 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Aluminum, powder-varnish coated Permissible operating temperatures NBR –35 to +80 °C Actuator versions

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-2:  Actuators Type 3271-52 of 60 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 055 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271-5 Diaphragm area 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 120 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 7.5 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish coated Permissible operating temperatures NBR –35 to +90 °C Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel, Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable.

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-3:  Actuators Type 3271-5 of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 056 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271-5 Diaphragm area 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 120 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish Diaphragm cases coated. Permissible operating temperatures NBR –35 to +90 °C Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-4:  Actuators Type 3271-5 of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 057 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277-5 Diaphragm area 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 120 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Reversible - ATC or ATO Fail-safe action Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish Diaphragm cases coated. Permissible operating temperatures NBR –35 to +90 °C Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-5:  Actuators Type 3277-5 of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 058 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271-5 with Handwheel Diaphragm area 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 120 cm2 6 bar Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO 2 120 cm 7.5 mm Rated travel 120 cm2 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish Diaphragm cases coated. NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Actuator versions

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-6:  Actuators Type 3271-5 with Handwheel of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 059 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277-5 with Handwheel Diaphragm area 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. 120 cm2 Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO 7.5 mm Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish Diaphragm cases coated. NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Actuator versions Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.14.-7:  Actuators Type 3277-5 with Handwheel of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 060 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.15.  Overview of actuators Type 3271 up to a diaphragm area 1000 cm2. Pneumatic Actuators Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

80 cm2 15 mm

3271

240 cm2 15 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves. Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

350 cm2 15 mm

3271

355 cm2 30 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves.

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

cm2

3271

700 30 mm

1000 cm2 30 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves.

Figure 9.2.15.-1:  Actuators Type 3271 of 240 cm2 to 1000 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 061 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Diaphragm area 80 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Rated travel Bench range Number of springs Diaphragm cases Permissible operating temperatures

80 cm2 6 bar Reversible - ATC or ATO 80 cm2 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression. (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated NBR –35 to +90 °C EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version

Actuator versions „„ Optional stainless steel version (made of 1.4301) „„ Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas of 80 Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable „„ Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.15.-2:  Actuators Type 3271 of 80 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 062 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Diaphragm area 240 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Rated travel Bench range Number of springs Diaphragm cases Permissible operating temperatures

240 cm2 6 bar Reversible - ATC or ATO 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression. (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version

Actuator versions „„ Optional stainless steel version (made of 1.4301) „„ Additional handwheel, Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable „„ Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire

Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.15.-3:  Actuators Type 3271 of 240 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 063 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Diaphragm area 350 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 350 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Diaphragm cases Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version Actuator versions „„ Optional stainless steel version made of WN 1.4301 „„ Additional handwheel, Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable „„ Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN. Figure 9.2.15.-4:  Actuators Type 3271 of 350 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 064 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Diaphragm area 700 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 700 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 30 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Diaphragm cases Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version Actuator versions „„ Optional stainless steel version (made of 1.4301) „„ Additional handwheel Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable „„ Fire-Lock version fail-safe action in case of fire. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.15.-5:  Actuators Type 3271 of 700 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 065 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Diaphragm area 1000 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 1000 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 30 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Permissible operating temperatures

NBR EDPM

–35 to +90 °C –50 to +120 °C

Actuator versions „„ Optional stainless steel version (made of 1.4301) „„ Additional handwheel Data Sheet T 8312 EN „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.15.-6:  Actuators Type 3271 of 1000 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 066 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.16.  Overview of the actuators of 1400 cm2 up to a diaphragm area 2 x 2800 cm2. Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

cm2

3271

1400 60 mm

1400 cm2 120 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves.

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

2800

cm2

3271

2 x 2800 cm2

120 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves.

Figure 9.2.16.-1:  Actuators Type 3271 of 1400 cm2, 2800 cm2, and 2 x 2800 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 067 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 1400 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 1400 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO 60 mm Rated travel 120 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Actuator versions „„ With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 160 mm using sidemounted handwheel effective diaphragm areas of 1400 cm2 „„ Actuator with travel stop, minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for 1400 cm2 actuators with 60 mm travel. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN Figure 9.2.16.-2:  Actuators Type 3271 of 1400 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 068 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 2800 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 2800 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO 2 Rated travel 2800 cm 120 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Actuator versions „„ With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 160 mm using sidemounted handwheel effective diaphragm areas of 2800 cm2 „„ Actuator with travel stop, minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for 2800 cm2 actuators. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN Figure 9.2.16.-3:  Actuator Type 3271 of 2800 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 069 of 292

Pneumatic Actuator Type 3271 2 x 2800 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Actuator versions „„ With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 160 mm using sidemounted handwheel. „„ Actuator with travel stop, minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for 2 x 2800 cm2 tandem actuators. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN Figure 9.2.16.-4:  Actuator Type 3271 of 2 x 2800 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 070 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.17.  Overview of actuators Type 3277 up to a diaphragm area 1000 cm2. Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

3277-5 120 cm2 15 mm

3277 240 cm2 15 mm

3277 350 cm2 15 mm

3277 355 cm2 30 mm

3277 700 cm2 30 mm

3277 1000 cm2 60 mm

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

Linear actuator in particular for attachment to Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Control Valves

Figure 9.2.17.-1:  SAMSON Actuators Type 3277 of 120 cm2 to 1000 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 071 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277-5 120 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 120 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish Diaphragm cases coated. Permissible operating temperatures NBR –35 to +90 °C

Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.17.-2:  Actuators Type 3277-5 of 120 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 072 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277 240 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 240 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Diaphragm cases Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version

Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.17.-3:  Actuators Type 3277 of 240 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 073 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277 350 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Rated travel Bench range Number of springs Diaphragm cases Permissible operating temperatures

350 cm2 6 bar Reversible - ATC or ATO 15 mm Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression. (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version

Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.17.-4:  Actuators Type 3277 of 350 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 074 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277 355 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 355 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 30 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated NBR –35 to +90 °C Permissible operating temperatures EDPM –50 to +120 °C Actuator versions

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.17.-5:  Actuators Type 3277 of 355 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 075 of 292

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277 700 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. 700 cm2 and 1000 cm2 Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 30 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Permissible operating temperatures

Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated Stainless steel 1.4301 (X5 CrNi 18 9) NBR –35 to +90 °C EDPM –50 to +120 °C Up to 80 °C in Fire-Lock version

Actuator versions „„ Additional handwheel with diaphragm areas 700 cm2 „„ Mechanical travel stop, min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Data Sheet T 8310-1 / -2 EN Figure 9.2.17.-6:  Actuators Type 3277 of 700 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 076 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Actuators Type 3277 1000 cm2

The Pneumatic Actuators contain a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Effective diaphragm area 1000 cm2 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar Fail-safe action Reversible - ATC or ATO Rated travel 60 mm Various bench ranges by varying the Bench range number of springs or their compression. Number of springs (See Table 9.2.22.1.-1) Diaphragm cases Permissible operating temperatures

Sheet steel, powder-varnish coated NBR EDPM

–35 to +90 °C –50 to +120 °C

Actuator versions

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Figure 9.2.17.-7:  Actuators Type 3277 of 1000 cm2 for Globe Valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 077 of 292

9.2.18.  Overview of Actuators Type 3371, 3372, Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

2780-1 120 cm2 6 / 12 / 15 mm

2780-2 120 cm2 6 / 12 / 15 mm

3371 120 cm2 15 mm

3371 350 cm2 30 mm

3372 120 cm2 15 mm

3372 120 cm2 15 mm

Versatile actuators Type 2780-1 and Type 2780-2 for use in heating, ventilation and airconditioning systems as well as for mechanical engineering.

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel

Actuators Type 3371, and 3372 only for Valve Series V2001. Type 3371 only for valve size DN 15 to 50 / NPS ½ to 2 (left), DN 65 to 100 / 2½ to 4 (right).

Type Diaphragm area Rated travel Actuators Type 3371 and 3372 only for Valve Series V2001. Type 3372 only for valve size DN 15 to 50 / NPS ½ to 2. With integrated i/p positioner, Valve CLOSED (left), Valve OPEN (right).

Figure 9.2.18.-1:  Versatile actuators for use in heating, ventilation and air-conditioning as well as for mechanical engineering.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 078 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.19.  Actuators Type 2780-1, and Type 2780-2 The Type 2780 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm-type actuators with internal compression springs. They are suitable for attachment to SAMSON Type 3213 and Type 3222 Globe Valves and to Type 3226 and Type 3260 Three-way Valves. Pneumatic Actuator Type 2780-1

Actuator stem extends retracts

Nominal size Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Rated travel Bench range Supply air pressure required Number of springs Ambient temperature

DN 15 to 50 (G½ to G1) 120 cm2 4 bar Reversible DN 15 to 25 6 mm G½ to G1 DN 32 to 50 12 mm Type 2780-1 0.4 to 1 bar Type 2780-2 0.4 to 2 bar 2.4 bar 3 6 springs for 0.4 to 2 bar bench range and 12 mm rated travel. -10 to + 80 °C

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. (See Data Sheet T 5840 EN) Figure 9.2.19.-1:  Actuators Type 2780-1

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 079 of 292

Pneumatic Actuator Type 2780-2

extends

Nominal size Effective diaphragm area Maximum supply pressure Fail-safe action Rated travel Bench range Supply air pressure required Number of springs Ambient temperature

Actuator stem

retracts

DN 15 to 50 (G½ to G1) 120 cm2 4 bar Reversible DN 15 to 25 6 mm G½ to G1 DN 32 to 50 12 mm Type 2780-1 0.4 to 1 bar Type 2780-2 0.4 to 2 bar 2.4 bar 3 6 springs for 0.4 to 2 bar bench range and 12 mm rated travel. -10 to + 80 °C

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. (See Data Sheet T 5840 EN) Figure 9.2.19.-2:  Actuators Type 2780-2

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 080 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3222 with Actuator Type 2780

Globe Valve Type 3222/2780-1 (Male thread connection)

Globe Valve Type 3222/2780-2 with positioner (Version with welding ends)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 081 of 292

9.2.20.  Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372 The actuators are designed for attachment to Series V 2001 Valves (Type 3321, Type 3323, Type 3531, Type 3535, Type 3214 (DN 65 to 100) and Type 3260 (DN 65 and 80).

14 8.4

8.6

8.7 8.3 8.5 8.1 8.2

8.8

7

8.9 14

6 16 1

i

15

p

i

10 10.1 11 12 13 14

Figure 9.2.20.-1:  Pneumatic and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

8.7 8.6

Page 082 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Type 3372 / 120 cm2 Integrated positioner actuator stem extends

Type 3372 / 120 cm2 Integrated positioner actuator stem retracts

Type 3371 / 120 cm2

Type 3371 / 350 cm2

Type 3372 / 120 cm2 with Type 3730 Positioner actuator stem extends / retracts

Type 3372 / 350 cm2 with Type 3730 Positioner actuator stem extends / retracts

Table 9.2.20.-2:  Pneumatic Actuators Type 3371 and Electropneumatic Actuators Type 3372

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 083 of 292

9.2.20.1  Technical data · Pressures in psi and bar Valve / Actuator Actuator area

Type 3321-IP / Type 3372 120

350 cm2

cm2

(NPS 2½ and larger)

Fail-safe position

120

350 cm2

cm2

(NPS 2½ and larger)

Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN

Reference variable

Bench range Rated travel

Type 3321-PP / Type 3371

4 to 20 mA

–

Valve CLOSED

30 to 48 psi 15 mm (2.1 to 3.3 bar)

32 to 55 psi 30 mm (2.2 to 3.8 bar)

30 to 48 psi 15 mm (2.1 to 3.3 bar)

32 to 55 psi 30 mm (2.2 to 3.8 bar)

Valve OPEN

6 to 20 psi 15 mm (0.4 to 1.4 bar)

22 to 39 psi 30 mm (1.5 to 2.7 bar)

6 to 20 psi 15 mm (0.4 to 1.4 bar)

22 to 39 psi 30 mm (1.5 to 2.7 bar)

Linear, deviation from terminal-based conformity ≤ 2 %

–

Hysteresis

≤1%

–

Variable position

≤7%

–

Degree of protection

IP 54 with integrated positioner (for 120 cm2 only) IP 66 with positioner Type 3730-0 /-1

–

Permissible ambient temperature

Standard: –4 to 176 °F (–20 to 80 °C) with metal cable gland: –22 to 176 °F (–30 to 80 °C)

–31 to 194 °F (–35 to 90 °C)

Characteristic

Note:

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

Table 9.2.20.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuators Type 3371 and 3372

Globe Valve Type 3321-IP DN 15 to 50 / NPS ½ to 2, actuator with integrated electropneumatic positioner

Globe Valve Type 3321 DN 15 to 50 NPS ½ to 2

DN 65 to 100 NPS 2½ to 4

Figure 9.2.20.1.-2:  Valve Series V2001 - Globe Valve Type 3321

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 084 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.21.  The cost-efficient positioner Type 3725 Main Features „„ Convenient on site operation via capacitive buttons and LC display „„ Convenient operation philosophy via proven 3730-1 operation structure „„ Internal contact less position sensing based on the 3738-20 platform, ideal to prevent problems caused through steam hammers „„ Travel pick up with lever on the backside assure to a seamless mounting adaption „„ 2 optional NAMUR limit switches „„ Convenient mounting kits for … ◊  … 3372 (V2001) ◊  … Direct attachment up to 700 cm2 ◊  … Rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Type 3321-IP Electropneumatic Globe Valve „„ with Type 3372 Electropneumatic Actuator, „„ optionally with integrated positioner (120 cm² only, with plug connector), or „„ Type 3725 or „„ Type 3730-0 or „„ Type 3730-1, „„ tight-closing function for completely venting or filling the actuator with air, reference variable 4 to 20 mA, max. 90 psi (6 bar) supply air, „„ fail-safe position valve CLOSED or valve OPEN, „„ optionally with limit switches Figure 9.2.21.-1:  Type 3321-IP Electropneumatic Globe Valve

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 085 of 292

9.2.22.  Operating travels for fail-safe action Supplementary specifications for Type 3271 and Type 3277 Actuators (up to 700 cm2) Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS „„ Actuators for fail-safe action “actuator stem extended by spring force” „„ Comparison between bench ranges and preferred operating travels (depending on operating travel) „„ Spring return force at 0 mm travel Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS „„ Actuators for fail-safe action “actuator stem retracted by spring force” „„ Comparison between bench ranges and preferred operating travels (depending on operating travel) Description of color markings Actuators with special springs. Use only in special cases. e.g. with mounting bracket for butterfly valves or 120 % operating travels. No handwheel available Operating ranges with top-mounted handwheel, (with 700 cm2 diaphragms, the upper spring range value is limited to 3.3 bar) Type 3273 with small side-mounted handwheel (80 mm travel, max. thrust 80 kN). Not with Type 3241 in DN 100 / NPS 4” to DN 150 / NPS 6” in combination with an insulating or bellows section. Cannot be used for mounting brackets for butterfly valves. Type 3273 with large side-mounted handwheel (150 mm travel, max. thrust 150 kN) Selection of the handwheel depends on the required thrust. Up to 80 kN small side-mounted handwheel (as a result, the max. supply pressure or upper spring range value for 2800 cm2 diaphragms is 3 bar). Large sidemounted handwheel for thrusts between 80 kN and 150 kN. Note: „„ With fail-safe action “actuator stem retracts” and on/off service, the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper spring range value by more than 3 bar. „„ With fail-safe action “actuator stem extends” and travel stops on both sides, the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper spring range value by more than 1.5 bar. „„ For Type 3241 Valves in DN 50 / NPS 2”, the maximum operating travel is 110 %.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 086 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.22.1  Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

120 3271-5 3277-5

240 Type 3271

350 Type 3271

0.40 2.00

0.24

60

7.5 1.4 to 2.3 10.5 4

0

1.40 2.30

0.84

60

7.5 2.1 to 3.3 10.5 8

0

2.10 3.30

1.26

120 7.5 0.4 to 0.8

9

3

0

-

-

0.48

120 7.5 0.8 to 1.6

9

6

0

-

-

0.96

120 7.5 1.7 to 2.1

9

6

0

1.70 2.10

2.04

120 7.5 2.4 to 3.0

9

12

0

2.40 3.00

2.88

120 15 0.2 to 1.0

16

3

0

0.60 1.00

0.72

0.20 1.00

0.24

120 15 0.4 to 2.0

16

6

0

1.20 2.00

1.44

0.40 2.00

0.48

120 15 1.4 to 2.3

15

6

0

1.85 2.30

2.22

1.40 2.30

1.68

120 15 2.1 to 3.3

15

12

0

2.70 3.30

3.24

2.10 3.30

2.52

240 15 0.2 to 1.0

17

3 12.5 0.70 1.10

1.68

0.30 1.10

0.48

240 15 0.4 to 2.0

17

6 12.5 1.40 2.20

3.36

0.60 2.20

0.96

240 15 0.6 to 3.0

17

12 12.5 2.10 3.30

5.04

0.90 3.30

1.44

350 15 0.2 to 1.0

22

3

25

0.80 1.20

2.80

0.40 1.20

0.70

350 15 0.4 to 2.0

22

6

25

1.60 2.40

5.60

0.80 2.40

1.40

350 15 0.6 to 3.0

22

12

25

2.40 3.60

8.40

1.20 3.60

2.10

350 15 1.4 to 2.3

15

6

0

1.85 2.30

6.48

1.40 2.30

4.90

350 15 2.1 to 3.3

15

12

0

2.70 3.30

9.45

2.10 3.30

7.35

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

0

Upper range value [ bar ]

7.5 0.4 to 2.0 10.5 4

19 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

60

Lower range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ] 0.12

Lower range value [ bar ]

0.20 1.00

Number of springs

0

Max. travel [ mm ]

7.5 0.2 to 1.0 10.5 2

Signal pressure range [ bar ] at rated travel

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Type 3271-5

60

15 mm

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

120

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271- 52

Rated travel [ mm ]

60

7.5 mm

Operating travel

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ] - Type

Bench range

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 087 of 292

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

38

3

25

1.00 1.20

3.55

0.40 1.20

2.84

355 30 0.4 to 2.0

38

6

25

2.00 2.40

7.10

0.80 2.40

5.68

355 30 0.6 to 3.0

38

12

25

3.00 3.60 10.65 1.20 3.60

8.52

700 30 0.2 to 1.0

38

3

30

1.00 1.20

5.60

700 30 0.4 to 2.0

38

6

30

2.00 2.40 14.00 1.60 2.40 11.20 1.40 2.40 9.80

700 30 0.6 to 3.0

38

12

30

3.00 3.60 21.00 2.40 3.60 16.80 2.10 3.60 14.70

700 30 1.4 to 2.3

30

8

0

2.10 2.30 14.70 1.85 2.30 12.95

700 30 2.1 to 3.3

30

12

0

3.00 3.30 21.00 2.70 3.30 18.90 2.50 3.30 17.50

30

15

0

3.40 3.80 23.80 3.05 3.80 21.35

30

18

0

3.90 4.30 27.30 3.45 4.30 24.15

700 30

2.35 to 3.8

700 30 2.6 to 4.3

7.00

0.80 1.20

19 mm

Table 9.2.22.1.-1:  Signal pressure range at operating travel 7.5 to 19 mm Note: „„ Signal pressure range 1.4 to 2.4 bar at operating travel 19 mm Globe Valve Type 3241 DN 80, Kvs/Cv100 -Value 100/120. (No Metal-Bellows construction, no Flow Divider I)

„„ Signal pressure range 2.1 to 3.6 bar at operating travel 19 mm Globe Valve Type 3241 DN 80, Kvs/Cv100 -Value 100/120. (No Metal-Bellows construction, no Flow Divider I)

„„ Signal pressure range 2.1 to 3.3 bar at operating travel 19 mm Globe Valve Type 3241 DN 80, Kvs/Cv100 -Value 100/120. (No Metal-Bellows construction, no Flow Divider I)

„„ Large sideways handwheel on inquiry

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

15 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

7.5 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

Signal pressure range [ bar ] at rated travel

355 30 0.2 to 1.0

Rated travel [ mm ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271 3277

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

700

Number of springs

Type 3277

Max. travel [ mm ]

355

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ] - Type

Bench range

Page 088 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

0.4 to 2.0

16

6 12.5 0.60 2.20 0.48

80

15

0.6 to 3.0

16

12 12.5 0.90 3.30 0.72

120

15

0.2 to 1.0

16

3

0

0.20 1.00 0.24

120

15

0.4 to 2.0

16

6

0

0.40 2.00 0.48

Type 3271 3277

120

15

1.4 to 2.3

15

6

0

1.40 2.30 1.68

120

15

2.1 to 3.3

15

12

0

2.10 3.30 2.52

240

240

15

0.2 to 1.0

17

3 12.5 0.30 1.10 0.72

Type 3271 3277

240

15

0.4 to 2.0

17

6 12.5 0.60 2.20 1.40

240

15

0.6 to 3.0

17

12 12.5 0.90 3.30 2.16

350

15

0.2 to 1.0

22

3

25

0.40 1.20 1.40

350

15

0.4 to 2.0

22

6

25

0.80 2.40 2.80

350

15

0.6 to 3.0

22

12

25

1.20 3.60 4.20

350

15

1.4 to 2.3

15

6

0

1.40 2.30 4.90

350

15

2.1 to 3.3

15

12

0

2.10 3.30 7.35

350

15

0.45 to 0.7

22

3

25

0.50 0.75 1.75

350

15

0.9 to 1.4

22

6

25

1.00 1.50 3.50

350

15 1.15 to 1.85 22

9

25

1.30 2.00 4.55

350

15

1.6 to 2.9

22

18

25

2.00 3.30 7.00

350

15

1.7 to 3.2

22

24

25

2.10 3.60 7.35

120

350 Type 3271

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

15

Upper range value [ bar ]

80

Type 3271 3277

60 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

3 12.5 0.30 1.10 0.24

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

16

Upper range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Max. travel [ mm ]

0.2 to 1.0

Upper range value [ bar ]

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

15

Lower range value [ bar ]

Rated travel [ mm ]

80

Number of springs

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

80

30 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

15 mm

Operating travel

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 089 of 292

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

Lower range value [ bar ]

Type 3271

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

1000

Number of springs

Type 3271 3277

Max. travel [ mm ]

700

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Type 3277

Rated travel [ mm ]

355

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ] 355

30

0.2 to 1.0

38

3

25

0.80 1.20 2.84

0.40 1.20 1.42

355

30

0.4 to 2.0

38

6

25

1.60 2.40 5.68

0.80 2.40 2.84

355

30

0.6 to 3.0

38

12

25

2.40 3.60 8.52

1.20 3.60 4.26

355

30

0.9 to 1.7

38

4

25

1.50 1.90 5.33

1.10 1.90 3.91

355

30

1.4 to 2.6

38

8

25

2.35 2.95 8.34

1.75 2.95 6.21

355

30

1.9 to 3.3

38

10

25

2.95 3.65 10.47 2.25 3.65 7.99

700

30

0.2 to 1.0

38

3

30

0.80 1.20 5.60

700

30

0.4 to 2.0

38

6

30

1.60 2.40 11.20 0.80 2.40 5.60

700

30

0.6 to 3.0

38

12

30

2.40 3.60 16.80 1.20 3.60 8.40

700

30

1.4 to 2.3

30

8

0

1.85 2.30 12.95 1.40 2.30 9.80

700

30

2.1 to 3.3

30

12

0

2.70 3.30 18.90 2.10 3.30 14.70

700

30

2.35 to 3.8

30

15

0

3.05 3.80 21.35 2.35 3.80 16.45

700

30

2.6 to 4.3

30

18

0

3.45 4.30 24.15 2.60 4.30 18.20

700

30 0.35 to 0.45 38

3

30

700

30

0.7 to 0.9

38

6

30

700

30

1.0 to 1.35

38

9

30

700

30

1.3 to 1.8

38

12

30

1.45 1.95 10.15

700

30

1.7 to 2.6

38

18

30

2.45 2.90 17.15 2.00 2.90 14.00

700

30

1.9 to 3.3

38

24

30

3.10 3.80 21.70 2.40 3.80 16.80

700

30

2.0 to 3.6

38

30

30

3.30 4.10 23.10 2.50 4.10 17.50

1000 60

0.4 to 2.0

80

6

25

2.00 2.40 20.00 1.60 2.40 16.00 0.80 2.40 8.00

1000 60

0.6 to 3.0

80

9

25

3.00 3.60 30.00 2.40 3.60 24.00 1.20 3.60 12.00

1000 60

0.8 to 2.8

80

9

25

2.80 3.30 28.00 2.30 3.30 23.00 1.30 3.30 13.00

1000 60

1.0 to 3.2

80

10

25

3.10 3.70 31.00 2.60 3.70 26.00 1.50 3.70 15.00

60 mm

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

30 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

15 mm

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

0.40 1.20 2.80

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 090 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Max. travel [ mm ]

Number of springs

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

0.2 to 1.0

80

6

25

1.00 1.20 14.00 0.80 1.20 11.20 0.40 1.20 5.60

1400 60

0.4 to 2.0

80

12

25

2.00 2.40 28.00 1.60 2.40 22.40 0.80 2.40 11.20

1400 60

0.5 to 2.5

80

18

25

2.50 3.00 35.00 2.00 3.00 28.00 1.00 3.00 14.00

6

25

0.60 1.05 8.40

140060 1400 60 0.5 to 0.95 80 Type 3271

60 mm

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

30 mm

Operating travel

1400 60

0.7 to 1.4

80

9

25

0.85 1.55 11.90

1400 60

0.85 to 1.8

80

12

25

1.55 2.00 21.70 1.05 2.00 14.70

1400 60

1.1 to 2.4

80

18

25

2.40 2.70 33.60 2.05 2.70 28.70 1.40 2.70 19.60

1400 60

1.3 to 2.8

80

24

25

2.80 3.20 39.20 2.45 3.20 34.30 1.70 3.20 23.80

1400 120

0.4 to 1.2

130

3

1400120 1400 120 0.8 to 2.4 130 6 Type 3271

15 mm

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

Rated travel [ mm ]

1400 60

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

1.00 1.20 14.00 0.80 1.20 11.20 2.20 2.40 30.80 2.00 2.40 28.00 1.60 2.40 22.40

1400 120

1.0 to 3.0

130

9

2.75 3.00 38.50 2.50 3.00 35.00 2.00 3.00 28.00

1400 120

1.2 to 3.6

130 12

3.30 3.60 46.20 3.00 3.60 42.00 2.40 3.60 33.60

Table 9.2.22.1.-2:  Signal pressure range at operating travel 15 to 60 mm

Note: Special Spring Ranges with Type 3271 Actuators Special spring ranges are often being used with pneumatic actuators when really standard spring ranges could be used instead. The problem often arises when special spring ranges are used that these actuators must be specially made and the tolerances of the springs are partly inadequate since the nominal travel of the valve cannot be set. When at all possible, only the spring ranges listed in the Data Sheet T 8310 should be used.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 091 of 292

2800 Type 3271

Upper range value [ bar ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

2.40 3.60 33.60 1.20 3.60 16.80

Upper range value [ bar ]

3.00 3.60 42.00

Lower range value [ bar ]

1400 120 1.2 to 3.6 130 12

Upper range value [ bar ]

2.00 3.00 28.00 1.00 3.00 14.00

Lower range value [ bar ]

2.50 3.00 35.00

Number of springs 9

Max. travel [ mm ]

1.60 2.40 22.40 0.80 2.40 11.20

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

2.00 2.40 28.00

Rated travel [ mm ]

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

120 mm

Operating travel

5.60

1400 120 1.0 to 3.0 130

Spring force at 0 mm travel [ kN ]

60 mm

Operating travel

0.80 1.20 11.20 0.40 1.20

1400- 1400 120 0.4 to 1.2 130 3 120 1400 120 0.8 to 2.4 130 6 Type 3271

30 mm

Operating travel

1.00 1.20 14.00

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

Additional possible spring preloading [ % ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM EXTENDS

2800 120 0.2 to 1.0 160

3

25 1.00 1.20 28.00

0.80 1.20 22.40 0.40 1.20 11.20

2800 120 0.4 to 2.0 160

6

25 2.00 2.40 56.00

1.60 2.40 44.80 0.80 2.40 22.40

2800 120 0.5 to 2.5 160

9

25 2.50 3.00 70.00

2.00 3.00 56.00 1.00 3.00 28.00

2800 120 0.6 to 3.0 160 12 25 3.00 3.60 84.00

2.40 3.60 67.20 1.20 3.60 33.60

2800 120 0.8 to 1.7 160

6

25

1.45 1.90 40.60 1.00 1.90 28.00

2800 120 0.9 to 2.2 160

9

25 2.15 2.50 60.20

1.85 2.50 51.80 1.20 2.50 33.60

2800 120 1.0 to 2.7 160 12 25 2.65 3.10 74.20

2.25 3.10 63.00 1.40 3.10 39.20

2800 120 1.1 to 2.3 160

6

25

2.00 2.60 56.00 1.40 2.60 39.20

2800 120 1.2 to 2.8 160

9

25 2.80 3.20 78.40

2.40 3.20 67.20 1.60 3.20 44.80

2800 120 1.3 to 3.3 160 12 25 3.30 3.80 92.40

2.80 3.80 78.40 1.80 3.80 50.40

5600 120 0.2 to 1.0 160

0.80 1.20 44.80 0.40 1.20 22.40

6

25 1.00 1.20 56.00

5600 120 0.4 to 2.0 160 12 25 2.00 2.40 112.00 1.60 2.40 89.60 0.80 2.40 44.80 5600 120 0.5 to 2.5 160 18 25 2.50 3.00 140.00 2.00 3.00 112.00 1.00 3.00 56.00

2×2800 Type 3271

5600 120 0.6 to 3.0 160 24 25 3.00 3.60 168.00 2.40 3.60 134.40 1.20 3.60 67.20 5600 120 0.8 to 1.7 160 12 25

1.45 1.90 81.20 1.00 1.90 56.00

5600 120 0.9 to 2.2 160 18 25 2.15 2.50 120.40 1.85 2.50 103.60 1.20 2.50 67.20 5600 120 1.0 to 2.7 160 24 25 2.65 3.10 148.40 2.25 3.10 126.00 1.40 3.10 78.40 5600 120 1.1 to 2.3 160 12 25

2.00 2.60 112.00 1.40 2.60 78.40

5600 120 1.2 to 2.8 160 18 25 2.80 3.20 156.80 2.40 3.20 134.40 1.60 3.20 89.60 5600 120 1.3 to 3.3 160 24 25 3.30 3.80 184.80 2.80 3.80 156.80 1.80 3.80 100.80 Table 9.2.22.1.-3:  Signal pressure range at operating travel 30 to 120 mm

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 092 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.22.2  Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS

Lower range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

0.20

1.00

60

7.5

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

2.00

60

7.5

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

2.30

60

7.5

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

3.30

120

7.5

0.2 to 1.0

0.40

0.80

120

7.5

0.4 to 2.0

0.80

1.60

120

7.5

1.4 to 2.3

1.70

2.10

120

7.5

2.1 to 3.3

2.40

3.00

120

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

120

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

3271-5 3277-5

120

15

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

1.85

1.40

2.30

120

15

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

2.70

2.10

3.30

240

240

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

240

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

240

15

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

350

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

350

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

350

15

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

350

15

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

1.85

1.40

2.30

350

350

15

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

2.70

2.10

3.30

Type 3271

350

15

0.45 to 0.7

0.45

0.70

350

15

0.9 to 1.4

0.90

1.40

350

15

1.15 to 1.85

1.15

1.85

350

15

1.6 to 2.9

1.60

2.90

350

15

1.7 to 3.2

1.70

3.20

Type 3271- 52

120 Type 3271-5

120

Type 3271 Type 3277

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Upper range value [ bar ]

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ] 0.2 to 1.0

30 mm

Operating travel Lower range value [ bar ]

Rated travel [ mm ] 7.5

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

60

60

19 mm

Operating travel Upper range value [ bar ]

15 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

7.5 mm

Operating travel

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 093 of 292

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS 7.5 mm

15 mm

19 mm

30 mm

Lower range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.40

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

355

30

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

355

355

30

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.20

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

Type 3277

355

30

0.9 to 1.7

0.90

1.10

0.90

1.30

0.90

1.70

355

30

1.4 to 2.6

1.40

1.70

1.40

2.00

1.40

2.60

355

30

1.9 to 3.3

1.90

2.25

1.90

2.60

1.90

3.30

700

30

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.40

0.20

0.60

0.20

0.70

0.20

1.00

700

30

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

1.40

0.40

2.00

700

30

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.20

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

700

30

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

1.60

1.40

1.85

1.40

2.30

700

30

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

2.40

2.10

2.70

2.10

3.30

700

30

2.35 to 3.8

2.35

2.70

2.35

3.05

2.35

3.80

700

30

2.6 to 4.3

2.60

3.00

2.60

3.45

2.60

4.30

700

30

0.35 to 0.45

700

30

0.7 to 0.9

700

30

1.0 to 1.35

700

30

1.3 to 1.8

1.30

1.80

700

30

1.7 to 2.6

1.70

2.15

1.70

2.60

700

30

1.9 to 3.3

1.90

2.60

1.90

3.30

700

30

2.0 to 3.6

2.00

2.80

2.00

3.60

700 Type 3271 3277

Upper range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

30

Lower range value [ bar ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

355

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

Operating travel

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Operating travel

Rated travel [ mm ]

Operating travel

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Bench range

Table 9.2.22.2.-1:  Signal pressure range at operating travel 7.5 to 30 mm

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 094 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

350 Type 3271

355 Type 3277

0.20

1.00

80

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

2.00

80

15

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

3.00

120

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

1.00

120

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

2.00

120

15

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

2.30

120

15

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

3.30

240

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

1.00

240

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

2.00

240

15

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

3.00

350

15

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

1.00

350

15

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

2.00

350

15

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

3.00

350

15

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

2.30

350

15

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

3.30

350

15

0.45 to 0.7

0.45

0.70

350

15

0.9 to 1.4

0.90

1.40

350

15

1.15 to 1.85

1.15

1.85

350

15

1.6 to 2.9

1.60

2.90

350

15

1.7 to 3.2

1.70

3.20

355

30

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

355

30

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

355

30

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

355

30

0.9 to 1.7

0.90

1.30

0.90

1.70

355

30

1.4 to 2.6

1.40

2.00

1.40

2.60

355

30

1.9 to 3.3

1.90

2.60

1.90

3.30

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

0.2 to 1.0

120 mm

Lower range value [ bar ]

15

Upper range value [ bar ]

80

60 mm

Operating travel Lower range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271 3277

Lower range value [ bar ]

240

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271 3277

Lower range value [ bar ]

120

30 mm

Operating travel

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Type 3271 3277

15 mm

Operating travel

Rated travel [ mm ]

80

Bench range

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 095 of 292

Upper range value [ bar ]

30

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

700

30

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

700

30

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

700

30

1.4 to 2.3

1.40

1.85

1.40

2.30

700

30

2.1 to 3.3

2.10

2.70

2.10

3.30

700

30

2.35 to 3.8

2.35

3.05

2.35

3.80

700

30

2.6 to 4.3

2.60

3.45

2.60

4.30

700

30

0.35 to 0.45

700

30

0.7 to 0.9

700

30

1.0 to 1.35

700

30

1.3 to 1.8

1.30

1.80

700

30

1.7 to 2.6

1.70

2.15

1.70

2.60

700

30

1.9 to 3.3

1.90

2.60

1.90

3.30

700

30

2.0 to 3.6

2.00

2.80

2.00

3.60

1000

60

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

1000

60

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.20

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

1000

60

0.8 to 2.8

0.80

1.30

0.80

1.80

0.80

2.80

1400

60

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.40

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

1400

60

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

1400

60

0.5 to 2.5

0.50

1.00

0.50

1.50

0.50

2.50

1400

60

0.5 to 0.95

0.50

0.95

1400

60

0.7 to 1.4

0.70

1.05

0.70

1.40

1400

60

0.85 to 1.8

0.85

1.35

0.85

1.80

1400

60

1.1 to 2.4

1.10

1.75

1.10

2.40

1400

60

1.3 to 2.8

1.30

2.05

1.30

2.80

1.30

1.70

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

Lower range value [ bar ]

700

120 mm

Lower range value [ bar ]

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271

Lower range value [ bar ]

1400-60

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271

60 mm

Operating travel

Lower range value [ bar ]

1000

30 mm

Operating travel

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Type 3271 3277

15 mm

Operating travel

Rated travel [ mm ]

700

Bench range

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS

Page 096 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

1400

120

1.0 to 3.0

1400

120

1.2 to 3.6

2800

120

2800

Upper range value [ bar ]

0.80

Lower range value [ bar ]

0.8 to 2.4

Upper range value [ bar ]

120

Lower range value [ bar ]

1400

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271

0.4 to 1.2

120 mm

Lower range value [ bar ]

2x2800

120

60 mm

Operating travel

Upper range value [ bar ]

Type 3271

1400

30 mm

Operating travel Lower range value [ bar ]

2800

Signal pressure range at rated travel [ bar ]

Type 3271

15 mm

Operating travel

Rated travel [ mm ]

1400 -120

Bench range

Effective diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Diaphragm area [ cm2 ]

Operating travels for fail-safe action STEM RETRACTS

0.40

0.60

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

1.00

0.80

1.20

0.80

1.60

0.80

2.40

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.50

1.00

2.00

1.00

3.00

1.20

1.50

1.20

1.80

1.20

2.40

1.20

3.60

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.40

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

120

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

2800

120

0.5 to 2.5

0.50

1.00

0.50

1.50

0.50

2.50

2800

120

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.20

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

2800

120

0.8 to 1.7

0.80

1.25

0.80

1.70

2800

120

0.9 to 2.2

0.90

1.55

0.90

2.20

2800

120

1.0 to 2.7

1.00

1.85

1.00

2.70

2800

120

1.1 to 2.3

1.10

1.40

1.10

1.70

1.10

2.30

2800

120

1.2 to 2.8

1.20

1.60

1.20

2.00

1.20

2.80

2800

120

1.3 to 3.3

1.30

1.80

1.30

2.30

1.30

3.30

5600

120

0.2 to 1.0

0.20

0.40

0.20

0.60

0.20

1.00

5600

120

0.4 to 2.0

0.40

0.80

0.40

1.20

0.40

2.00

5600

120

0.5 to 2.5

0.50

1.00

0.50

1.50

0.50

2.50

5600

120

0.6 to 3.0

0.60

1.20

0.60

1.80

0.60

3.00

5600

120

0.8 to 1.7

0.80

1.25

0.80

1.70

5600

120

0.9 to 2.2

0.90

1.55

0.90

2.20

5600

120

1.0 to 2.7

1.00

1.85

1.00

2.70

5600

120

1.1 to 2.3

1.10

1.40

1.10

1.70

1.10

2.30

5600

120

1.2 to 2.8

1.20

1.60

1.20

2.00

1.20

2.80

5600

120

1.3 to 3.3

1.30

1.80

1.30

2.30

1.30

3.30

Table 9.2.22.2.-2:  Signal pressure range at operating travel 15 to 120 mm

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 097 of 292

9.2.23.  Pneumatic piston actuator The actuator consists basically of a cylinder, a piston with seal elements and the actuator stem which is sealed at least on one side. This actuator type is hardly surpassed as far as simplicity and robustness is concerned. Through extensive standardization a broad range of actuator sizes are available. However, these actuators can only utilize their full strength in cases where a sufficiently high air supply pressure is available. This allows relatively small piston diameters and compact dimensions. Since generally special tubes are employed, with a super-finish inside, it is quite simple to create piston actuators with a very long travel. A spring-return action cannot so simply and elegantly be produced as it can be for pneumatic diaphragm actuators, because the necessary space inside the cylinder is not available. For this reason, the return spring is usually positioned outside of the cylinder. A simple piston actuator is represented in Figure 9.2.24.-2. 9.2.24.  Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275 The actuators are mainly used with Type 3241 Valves in pressure swing adsorption plants. Special features „„ Small overall height „„ Powerful thrust due to the supply pressure of max. 6 bar „„ Low friction „„ Temperature range from –30 to 80 °C The actuators with 314 und 490 cm2 areas are fixed to a yoke which is designed to accomodate a pneumatic or electropneumatic positioner. This type of direct attachment has the following advantages: „„ Tight and accurate linkage „„ Adjustments are not affected during transport „„ Travel pick-off protected against touching and external influences „„ meeting the requirements of the German Accident Prevention „„ Regulations (VBG 5) „„ Easy pneumatic connection between actuator and positioner Figure 9.2.24.-1:  Piston actuator Type 3275

The actuator with 804 cm2 areas does need a yoke. The valve accessories are mounted onto the NAMUR interface. A special piston actuator type is often used for valves with rotary motion of 90 degrees. In this case a double piston translates, via a rack and pinion gear Table 9.2.27.9.-1, or via a lever linkage Figure 9.3.-2 and Figure 9.3.3.-1 the linear movement of the actuator into a rotation angle of max. 90°.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 098 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275 Effective actuator area 314 or 490 cm2

Effective actuator area 804 cm2

Figure 9.2.24.-2:  Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275

9.2.25.  Principle of operation The piston of the actuator is pressurized with the supply air over the two connections (G ⅜ or G ½). The double-acting piston actuator does not have a defined fail-safe action as it does not have spring assemblies.

Technical data Version Type Actuator area cm2 Supply pressure max. Rated travel mm Piston displacement cm3 Air connection Max. perm. leakage (t ≥ 0 °C) Perm. temperature range for continuous operation

3275 490 6 bar

314 6 bar 15 471

30 942

G⅜ 50 cm3/min

15 735

30 1470

G½ 58 cm3/min

804 6 bar 15 1206

G½ 70 cm3/min

–30 to 80 °C

Table 9.2.25.-1:  Technical data of Pneumatic Piston Actuator Type 3275

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

30 2412

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 099 of 292

bar 6

5

4

314

cm 2

3

80

49

0c

cm 2

m2

4

2

1

0

0

10

20 18.4

30 29.4

40

50 47.3

kN

Figure 9.2.25.-2:  Diagram showing forces of Type 3275 Pneumatic Piston Actuator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 100 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.26.  Mounting Servovalve actuators on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves In cooperation with Servovalve, an interface has been created which allows piston actuators with up to 200 kN (higher forces on request) to be mounted onto SAMSON valves. Depending on the valve size and the actuator force required, there are three different connection patterns: „„ Connection pattern 1 corresponding to connection diameter 30 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators up to 700 cm2). „„ Connection pattern 2 corresponding to connection diameter 60 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators 1400-60 cm2) „„ Connection pattern 3 corresponding to connection diameter 100 mm (comparable to SAMSON actuators 1400-120 cm2 and larger) TV-SK 9902 shows the various connection patterns including the required ordering data. 9.2.26.1  PD Pneumatic linear actuator PD actuator can operate all kind of on-off or modulating valve with linear shaft motion. Servovalve actuator type PD consists of one or more pneumatic double acting cylinders designed to operate linear valves as globe or gate valves. In this catalogue standard actuators are shown for cylinder diameter sizes up to 800 mm. For greater thrusts or larger cylinder sizes than shown, special execution can be realized on request. PD actuator is designed and manufactured so as to operate in the heaviest work condition in every environment according to the international specification. Typical features are the extremely simple and rugged construction, the special care in the components material selection to reduce the corrosion phenomenon. All actuators are enclosed in order to guarantee a water proof protection. PD actuator can be equipped with mechanical or hydraulic manual emergency device. A PTFE charged slide guarantees a perfect drive and alignment of the piston under all load conditions allowing gasket seals long life. Each execution can be supplied with equipment and device for local or remote control. Chromium plated carbon steel shaft and PTFE charged bushings reduce the sliding friction of the actuator moving components. Standard cylinder up to size DN 200 is realized in special aluminium alloy and from DN 250 is realized in chromium plated carbon steel in order to prevent corrosion phenomenon and make the piston linear movement easier. PD actuator is supplied with a standard painted surface protection with one primer layer and one alkydic resin layer. Other coatings are available on request. The inner parts of PD actuator are lifetime lubricated, therefore only replacement of the rubber gaskets may become necessary after a long working time.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 101 of 292

All PD actuators undergo many tests before delivering to the customer for being assembled to the valve. The modular elements system , with which the actuators are built, allows an easy and sure assembly and a safe and easy maintenance. SERVOVALVE is certified by DNV and actuators are designed, manufactured and tested according to ISO EN 9001-2000 and, if requested, according to 97/23/CE directive (PED) and 94/9/CE directive (ATEX). 9.2.26.2  Double Acting Type PD 125 to PD 200

Type PD 250 to PD 800

Type PD 420/2 to PD 800/2

Figure 9.2.26.2.-1:  Sectional drawing of Pneumatic Linear Actuator Type PD125 to PD 800

9.2.26.3  Double Acting with Handwheel PDV 125 to PDV 200

PDV 205 to PDV 420

Figure 9.2.26.3.-1:  Double Acting with Handwheel for Actuator PDV 125 to PDV 420

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 102 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.26.4  Double Acting with Manual Gear PDR 360 to PDR 800

PDR 420/2 to PDR 800/2

Figure 9.2.26.4.-1:  Double Acting with Handwheel for Actuator PDR 360 to PDR 800/2

9.2.26.5  Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump PDH 500 to PDH 800

PDH 420/2 to PDH 800/2

Figure 9.2.26.5.-1:  Double Acting with Manual Hydraulic Pump for PDH 500 to PDH 800 and PDH 420/2 to PDH 800/2

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 103 of 292

Double Acting Serie PD Air working pressure Standard design pressure Air test pressure Standard temperature range

2 to 8 bar 10 bar 15 working pressure -20 ÷ +80 °C Instrument air (dry not lubricated) Medium Special medium type on request Different medium pressure on request On-off or modulating execution Equipped with adapter or bracket and hub for coupling to the valve Equipped with adjustable mechanical stop-screws Execution on request Under sea for marine service Special environmental condition High or low temperature Suitable for water-proof or explosion-proof zone Pneumatic and electric equipment (limit switches – solenoid valve – positioner – etc.) Optional Equipment Electro-pneumatic circuit for remote and local control of valve Air tank and equipment for fail safe action For all further data, accessory, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.26.5.-2:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Double Acting Serie PD

Double Acting Serie PD Actuators Thrust in kN Actuator Type PD 125 PD 160 PD 200 PD 250 PD 300 PD 360 PD 420 PD 500 PD 520 PD 600

Minimum operating air pressure 3 bar

4 bar

5 bar

6 bar

3.3 5.4 8.5 13 19 27 38 49 58 70

4.4 7.2 11 18 25 37 51 65 78 94

5.5 9 14 22 32 46 64 81 97 117

6.6 11 17 27 38 55 77 98 117 140

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 104 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Double Acting Serie PD Actuators Thrust in kN Actuator Type

Minimum operating air pressure 3 bar

4 bar

5 bar

6 bar

PD 620 PD 700 PD 800

83 96 130

110 130 170

140 160 210

170 190 250

PD 420/2 PD 500/2 PD 520/2 PD 600/2 PD 620/2 PD 700/2 PD 800/2

77 98 120 140 170 190 250

100 130 160 190 220 250 330

130 165 200 230 280 320 420

160 200 235 280 330 380 500

Table 9.2.26.5.-3:  Actuators Thrust in kN of pneumatic actuator Double Acting Serie PD

Equipment description for typical pneumatic circuits (Figure 9.2.26.5.-5) Pos.

Equipment

Pos.

Equipment

Pos.

Equipment

1

Limit Switch

10

Non Return Valve

19

Manual lockable Distributor 3/2

2

By-Pass

11

Air Lock Distributor

20

Emergency Solenoid Valve 3/2

3

Hydraulic Manual Distributor

12

Air Tank

21

Filter

4

Hydraulic Relief Valve

13

Discharge Plug

22

Position Transmitter

5

Hydraulic Manual Pump

14

Pneumatic Relief Valve

23

Positioner

6

Pneumatic Solenoid Valve 4/2

15

Pressure Switch

24

Booster

7

Air Set

16

Gauge Air

25

Pneumatic Distributor 4/2

8

Unidirectional Flow Regulator

17

Pressure Reductor

26

Manual Distributor 4/2

9

Pneumatic Distributor 3/2

18

Flow Regulator

Table 9.2.26.5.-4:  Equipment description for typical pneumatic circuits

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 105 of 292

Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD PD

PDV

PDR

PDH 2 3

2

2

4 1

1

2 2

1

5

1

PD/SA

8

8

17

10

6

6

18

7

7

Pneumatic Connection

Pneumatic Connection

PD/LK

PD/AL 14 16

11

6

12

6 13

7 Pneumatic Connection

7 Pneumatic Connection

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

10

Page 106 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD PD/AC

14 25

16 17 12

20 10

13

Pneumatic Connection

21

14 25

16 12

17

18

19 13

20

10 21 Pneumatic Connection

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 107 of 292

Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD PD/FS

SIGNAL 22

9

9

23 SIGNAL

14 16

20

17

12

15

13 10

21

Pneumatic Connection

9

9

SIGNAL 23 17

14

24 26

16 12

20

24

13 21

10 Pneumatic Connection

Figure 9.2.26.5.-5:  Typical pneumatic circuits for Double Acting Actuators Series PD

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 108 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.  Rack and pinion pneumatic actuator

®

4th GENERATION PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR

Member of SAMSON Group

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 109 of 292

9.2.27.1  AIR TORQUE delivery program Standard series 90° rotation N° 15 sizes double acting „„ Torque at 5.5 bar from 6.7 Nm to 4,955 Nm „„ Torque at 80 psi from 59.1 lb-in to 44,900 Lb-in N° 14 sizes spring return „„ Spring torque from 3.4 Nm to 2,207 Nm „„ Spring torque from 29.8 lb-in to 19,530 Lb-in

3-Position or dosing actuator with external Adjustable intermediate position available in: „„ 90° Rotation double acting „„ 90° Rotation spring return „„ 120° and 180° rotation double acting

Actuator with 100% external travel stop

Fast acting actuator

Lock-out capability in fully-open or fully-closed position

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 110 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.1  AIR TORQUE delivery program

Double acting and spring return actuator with hydraulic speed control

Forged stainless steel double acting and spring return actuator

Double acting actuator in 120°, 135°, 180° or other stroke available in 9 sizes

Double acting actuator in 120°, 135°, 180° or other stroke available in 9 sizes

Spring return actuator in 180° stroke available in 9 size

180° spring return actuator with 90° fail safety position

Table 9.2.27.1.-1:  AIR TORQUE delivery program

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 111 of 292

9.2.27.2  Design The new 4th Generation rack and pinion pneumatic actuator has been designed, developed and tested incorporating the latest technology and materials available, with some innovative design features. As a result of this product research we have obtained a high grade product with the following characteristics: „„ Reliability „„ High performance „„ Wider product range permitting a more economical sizing selection „„ Innovative and patented universal drive shaft and multifunction position indicator „„ Full compliance with latest worldwide specifications „„ A wide selection of highest levels of corrosion protection technology „„ Aesthetically compact and modern style with no external cavities to avoid deposit build up.

9.2.27.3  Construction Extruded aluminum body with both internal and external corrosion protection 1 having a honed cylinder surface for longer life and a lower coefficient of friction. 2

3

4

5

Dual piston rack and pinion design for compact construction, symmetric mounting position, high-cycle life and fast operation. Reverse rotation can be accomplished in the field by simply inverting the pistons. Two independent external travel stop adjustments permit easy and precise adjustment of +/- 4° in both directions. This adjustment may be made in either the open or closed position and provides for accurate valve alignment. Universal and anti-blowout patented drive shaft for an easy conversion from parallel to diagonal square and vice versa. This feature permits a lower and more flexible stock. UNIVERSAL DOUBLE SQUARE design available as option on 4th Generation and as standard on Power Technology permits easy adaptation to any valve and allows for a lower and more flexible inventory. A single compact design utilizing identical body and end caps for both double acting and spring return models. This feature reduces inventory and allows field conversion, by adding or removing modular spring cartridges.

6 Multifunctional position indicator for visual position indication and a direct, easy, economical way to mount popular sensors. 7

Multiple bearings and guides on pistons and racks for precise operation, low friction, high cycle life and a blowout proof pinion shaft.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 112 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

8 Modular pre loaded spring cartridges designed with coated springs for simple range versatility, greater safety and corrosion resistance. 9 Fully machined teeth on piston racks and pinion shaft for accurate positioning, low backlash and maximum engagement resulting in overall efficient operation. 10 Electroless nickel-plated blowout resistant, bearing guided, one-piece pinion shaft for improved safety and maximum cycle life. 11 Selected high quality bearings and seals that provide a wide operating temperature range, low friction and high cycle life. 12

Internal and external stainless steel fasteners for long term corrosion resistance.

13 Full conformance to following latest specifications: ISO 5211, DIN 3337 and VDI/ VDE 3845 for product interchangeability and easy mounting of solenoids, limit switches and other accessories.

6 1 12

11 9

5 8

3

4 7

2 10

13

Figure 9.2.27.3.-1:  Design and construction

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 113 of 292

9.2.27.4  Range of Options, „„ With the 4th generation actuator we are able to offer 6 different levels of protections A, B, C, D, E, P. Please see table of protection levels available N° P04/03. „„ Stainless steel 303 or 316 drive shafts are available on request for all sizes no matter the type of corrosion protection selected. „„ For extremely high or low temperature applications all models may be equipped with FPM or Silicone “O” rings along with an AIR TORQUE tested and certified suitable lubricant. „„ 100% Adjustable travel stop. „„ Economical “lock out” capability in fully-open or fully-closed position. „„ Multifunction position indicator with available Stainless Steel metal inserts providing for proximity contact points. „„ Other than the standard double square bottom drive shaft connection, we can supply a keyed drive connection, a flat head connection or a special personalized drive connection. „„ 120° and 180° Actuator rotation and intermediate rotations like 135°. „„ 3 Position and Dosing Actuators. „„ 3 position 180° Spring return Actuators with 90° fail safety position. „„ Actuator with hydraulic speed control (Damper). „„ Fast Acting Actuators. 9.2.27.5  Quality Manufacturing „„ AIR TORQUE actuators are manufactured under a quality system independently assessed and approved to ISO 9001-2000. „„ Every actuator is factory tested and provided with a unique serial number for traceability. „„ Every actuator is properly marked in accordance with the latest applicable international standard with all product data and a complete product identification. „„ Each actuator is individually supplied with Manual Instruction for use and maintenance in 5 languages. „„ Each actuator is individually packed in a durable carton box having the full description of the product for protection and easy identification. 9.2.27.6  Accessories available „„ Different square reductions suitable for drive. „„ Centering rings for all sizes. „„ Brackets „„ Couplings „„ Solenoid valves „„ Switch boxes „„ Proximity switches and sensors „„ Gear boxes „„ Positioners

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 114 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.7  Multi-function indicator The multi-function indicator which is supplied as standard on 4th Generation Actuator and manufactured in composite material is suitable for: Multi-function indicator Position indication Visual indication of the Actuator/Valve position is shown via a color coded insert and Namur slot. The indicator is suitable for all types of drive shaft and either direction of actuator rotation. Actuator ancillary drive The Namur drive slot in the position indicator permits direct drive engagement of switch boxes and positioners. Device in Device with combination with integrated solenoid. common used external solenoids.

Direct mounting of sensors The indicator can be supplied with metal inserts to permit easy and economical installation of many types of sensors: P+F, IFM, TURK, etc.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 115 of 292

Multi-function indicator Ancillary installation without multi-function indicator The 4th Generation actuator can be supplied upon request with a Stainlees Steel (S.S.) Cover that replaces the standard indicator and has the Namur S.S. Cover insert drive slot permitting: with VDI/VDE slot „„ Fitment of ancillary such as switch boxes and positioners „„ Indication of actuator position via the Namur slot „„ Operate at high temperature „„ Manual operation of the actuator in cases of emergency. 100% Travel stop adjustment on 4th generation actuator

Longer screws for 100% stroke adjustment

The 4th Generation standard actuator provides stroke adjustment of + or - 4° in both directions 0° and 90°. When a stroke of less than 90° is required e.g. 1°, 5°, 10°, 25°, 50°, 80°, etc. the actuator can be supplied with special bolts in both End-Caps to allow stroke adjustment or limitation, from 0° to 90° according to customer requirements. The 100% TRAVEL STOP ADJUSTMENT is available on all of the 4th Generation actuator range.

Lock-out capability in fully-open or fully-closed position

Special longer bolt, to use only to lock the

The 4th generation actuator offers an economical solution when is requested to locking the actuator in the fully-open (90°) or fully-closed (0°) position. The actuator can be supplied with a special bolt and locking device to permanently lock the actuator in position by using a padlock and preventing unwanted operation.

actuator in one position when you need. Figure 9.2.27.7.-1:  Multi-function indicator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 116 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.8  Operating conditions „„ Operating media: Dry or lubricated air or inert/non-corrosive gases on condition that they are compatible with internal actuator parts and lubricant. The operating media must have a dew point equal to -20 °C (-40 °F) or at least 10 °C below the ambient temperature. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μ. „„ Supply pressure: For Double Acting and Spring Return actuators the maximum supply pressure is 8 bar (116 psi). Minimum supply pressure is 2.5 bar (36 psi). ◊  Operating Temperature: Standard product from -20°C (-4°F) to +80°C (+176°F) ◊  Low temperature LT actuator with silicon „O‘‘ rings from -40°C (-40°F) to +80°C (+176° F) ◊  High temperature HT actuator with FPM „O“ rings from -15°C (+5°F) to +150°C (+300°F) Caution: For low and high temperature service, special grease is required. Please contact AIR TORQUE for each application. High and low temperature will vary the output torque of the actuator. „„ Stroke: The stroke for AIR TORQUE actuators is as follows (See technical data): ◊  Standard construction: 90° rotation with stroke adjustment at 0° and 90° + or - 4° ◊  Type Y 120° stroke: 120° rotation with stroke adjustment at 0° and 120° + or - 4° ◊  Type X 180° stroke: 180° rotation with stroke adjustment at 0° and 180° + or - 4°. „„ Operating Time: See Technical Data Sheet „„ Lubrication: Actuators are factory lubricated for the life under normal operating conditions. The standard lubricant is suitable for use from -20 °C (-40 °F) to +80 °C (+176 °F). For low (LT) and high (HT) temperature service, where special grease is required please contact AIR TORQUE. „„ Construction: Twin piston rack and pinion actuator design suitable for both indoor and outdoor installation. „„ Actuator designation and Marking: The actuator type, size, operating pressure, output torque, direction of rotation, orientation of failure mode, operating temperature and drive type are determined by actuator designation. AIR TORQUE actuators are supplied with a label showing all this informations: type, model (including protection and if applicable the LT or HT for operating temperature), stroke, maximum permissible supply pressure, direction of rotation, output torque, ancillary mounting detail, pressure connection, actuator/valve mounting detail and serial number.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 117 of 292

9.2.27.9  Operating function and direction of rotation The standard rotation is clockwise to close, counter-clockwise rotation is achieved when port 2 is pressurised. For actuator marked LF the rotation is counter-clockwise to close, clockwise rotation is obtained when port 2 is pressurised

Double Acting operation function (standard rotation)

Air supplied to Port 2 forces the pistons apart and towards the actuators end caps, with the exhaust air exiting at Port 4, a counter-clockwise rotation is achieved.

"2“

"4"

"2"

"4"

"2"

"4"

"2"

"4"

Air supplied to Port 4 forces the pistons together with exhaust air exiting at Port 2, a clockwise rotation is achieved.

Single Acting operation function (standard rotation)

Air supplied to Port 2 forces the pistons apart and toward the actuator end caps, compressing the springs with the exhaust air existing at Port 4, a counter clockwise rotation is achieved.

On loss of air pressure (air or electric failure) at Port 2 allows the springs to force the pistons together with the exhaust air exiting at Port 2, a clockwise rotation is achieved.

Table 9.2.27.9.-1:  Operating function and direction of rotation

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 118 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.10  Torque diagram Double Acting actuators In double acting actuators (Figure 9.2.27.10.-1) the output torque is the result of the pistons force (given by the air supply pressure) multiplied by the pitch shaft radius (lever arm) less the force lost for friction (efficiency): for this reason the output torque is linear (Figure 9.2.27.10.-1).

LA = effective lever arm

Torque Nm

Torque

Actuator Torque

Air pressure

LA

"2"

"4"

0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.10.-1:  The Principle of double acting actuator

For double acting actuators in normal working conditions the suggested safety factor is 15-20%. Air Torque actuators are designed for precise and accurate operation, maximum machined teeth engagement, low backlash and multiple bearings on pistons to ensure the highest level of efficiency and high cycle life. 9.2.27.11  Spring Return Actuator When port 2 is pressurized and exhaust air exits from port 4, both pistons move towards the end-caps and compress the springs (Table 9.2.27.9.-1) making the drive shaft turn. For standard assembly a counter-clockwise rotation “ccw” is obtained (clockwise rotation is possible by changing the pistons assembly). When air or electricity fails, a fail-safe position is guaranteed by the springs force. For standard assembly a clockwise rotation “cw” is obtained (counter-clockwise rotation is possible by changing the pistons assembly). In spring return actuators the output torque is the result of two operations, whose values depend on the stroke position (0° or 90°). In spring return actuators the output torque is the result of the force (air or springs acting on the pistons) multiplied by the lever arm.

Figure 9.2.27.11.-1:  Type 3967 Solenoid Valve, attachment with NAMUR interface to rotary

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 119 of 292

First operation (Figure 9.2.27.11.-2) The output torque is generated by air supply pressure at Port 2 after compressing the springs, called “OUTPUT TORQUE AIR STROKE”. In this case air forces the pistons from the 0° to the 90° position and consequently the torque starts from a high value and during the stroke it constantly decreases until 90° (Figure 9.2.27.11.-2) due to the natural force that springs generate (oppose) when they are compressed. LA = effective lever arm

Torque Nm

Torque Ou Air s tpu tro t T ke or qu e

LA

"2"

"4"

0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.11.-2:  The Principle of single acting actuator with compressed air

Second operation (Figure 9.2.27.11.-3) The output torque is generated by the force that springs release onto the pistons when air fails, called “Output Torque Spring Stroke”. In this case the torque, starting from the 90° position, constantly decreases until 0° because of the springs extending (Figure 9.2.27.11.-2).

LA = Lever arm

Torque Nm

ke tro ue s rq g rin ut to p S tp Ou

Spring force

LA

"2"

"4"

0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.11.-3:  The Principle of single acting actuator with spring

Air Torque spring return actuators are designed to produce a balanced torque in the two conditions explained above when the number of springs per side is equal to the air pressure supply (4 bar - 4 springs each side) as shown in Figure 9.2.27.11.-4. For certain applications it is possible to achieve (where desired), the unbalanced torque as

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 120 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

shown in Figure 9.2.27.11.-5, by altering the relationship between the number of springs per side and air pressure supply in bar (for example 6 springs and 5.5 bar or vice versa). In spring return applications two conditions can be achieved: air failure to close or air failure to open. The suggested safety factor for spring return actuators in normal working conditions is 20-25%. Torque Nm

Air S tr Torq oke ue

e trok S g in Spr orque T

Safety Factor Ball Valve Torque 0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.11.-4:  Ball valve torque

Torque Nm

Air S tr Torq oke ue

Stroke Spring ue Torq

Safety Factor Butterfly Valve Torque 0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.11.-5:  Butterfly valve torque

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 121 of 292

9.2.27.12  Air Torque Actuator Sizing Sizing example of Double Acting AT actuator (see also technical data): „„ Published Butterfly Valve torque = 40 Nm „„ Safety factor (20%) = 40 Nm + 20% = 48 Nm „„ Air supply pressure available = 5 bar

Torque Nm Actuator Torque

Safety Factor

Butterfly Valve Torque 0°

Rotation °

90°

Figure 9.2.27.12.-1:  AT-Diagram for Butterfly Valve

The double acting AT actuator that produces a minimum of 48 Nm at 5 bar is AT200 (see also the Figure 9.2.27.12.-1). Spring to close when air fails (Balanced Torque) see also the Figure 9.2.27.11.-4. Published Ball Valve torque = 80 Nm Safety factor (20%) = 80 Nm + 20% = 96 Nm Air supply pressure available = 5 bar The spring return AT actuator selected is AT400 S10, because it produces the following values: Spring stroke 0° = 105 Nm Spring stroke 90° = 165 Nm Air stroke 0° = 172 Nm Air stroke 90° = 112 Nm

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 122 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Spring to close when air fails see also the Figure 9.2.27.11.-5. (Unbalanced Torque) Published Butterfly Valve torque = 45 Nm Safety factor (20%) = 47 Nm + 20% = 56.4 Nm Air supply pressure available = 5.5 bar The spring return AT actuator selected is AT 300 S12, because it produces the following values: Spring stroke 0° = 60.8 Nm Spring stroke 90° = 94.5 Nm Air stroke 0° = 85.4 Nm Air stroke 90° = 51.7 Nm 9.2.27.13  Sizing information „„ The aim of this information is to assist in the correct selection of AIR TORQUE actuators. Before fitting an AIR TORQUE actuator onto any valve the following data must be considered. „„ Breakaway torque of the valve + safety factor as recommended by the manufacturer/ considering the operating conditions. „„ Air supply pressure available to the actuator „„ Type of actuator “D” (double acting) or “S” (spring return) and output torque of actuator at the available air supply pressure „„ Actuator rotation and the fail mode (to fail open or to fail close) The correct selection of an actuator is critical, if the actuator is oversized the valve stem can be overstressed, on the contrary if the actuator is undersized it cannot produce enough torque to permit full valve operation. Generally we can say that the torque required for valve operation comes from the friction between the metallic parts of the valve (for example ball or disc) and the seals (seats). Moreover the torque is influenced by various factors depending on the type of application of the valve (service condition), service temperature, operation frequency, line and differential pressure, flow media (lubricated, dry or slurry). The following examples show the torque characteristic for 3 types of quarter-turn valves, Ball Valve, Butterfly Valve and Plug Valve.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 123 of 292

Ball Valve Ball valve concept of construction is based essentially on a polished ball (including a through port) contained between two seats 70-80 % (upstream and downstream). The ball rotation allows the flow or stops the flow through the Torque % valve. Differential of pressure between 25-30 % upstream and downstream pressure forces the ball against the downstream seat (floating ball design). In this case the valve torque is generated by the friction between the ball, Valve Rotation CLOSE OPEN seat,stem and packing. As shown in the diagram below the highest point of torque occurs when with the presence of pressure, and the ball in the closed position, the valve is moved to the open position (breakaway torque). Butterfly Valve 100 %

BALL VALVE TORQUE

Butterfly valve concept of construction is based essentially on a disc fixed on an axis. In the closed position the disc is completely contained by the seat. The open position is achieved when the disc is rotated (through its stem) becomes parallel to the flow. Torque % On the contrary, the closed position is 15-20 % achieved when the disc is perpendicular to the flow. With a butterfly valve the torque is generated by the friction between the disc, Valve Rotation CLOSE OPEN seat and the stem packing. Also torque may be effected by the differential pressure that forces on the disc. The highest point of torque, as shown in the diagram below, is in the closed position, and after only a small rotation torque is considerably reduced. Plug Valve Plug valve concept construction is based PLUG VALVE TORQUE 100 % essentially on a male (plug) contained in a female cone (seat). The plug provides a 80-90 % through port in one direction and with its rotation into the seat the opening and closure Torque % of the valve is achieved. The torque is usually not influenced by the flow pressure, but is generated essentially by the friction between the seat and the plug, during the opening + closing cycle. Valve Rotation CLOSE OPEN The highest point of torque as shown in the diagram below, occurs in the closed position and remains high for the rest of the operation, because the torque is not influenced by pressure. 100 %

BUTTERFLY VALVE TORQUE

Table 9.2.27.13.-1:  Sizing information

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 124 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.14  4th Generation pneumatic actuator

Figure 9.2.27.14.-1:  4th Generation pneumatic actuators: Model AT 051, AT 101, AT 201, AT 251, AT 301, AT 351, AT 401, AT 451, AT 501, AT 551, AT 601, AT 651, AT 701, and AT 801

Figure 9.2.27.14.-2:  Assembly examples of the AIR-TORQUE Actuator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 125 of 292

9.2.27.15  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 051 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 051DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 8.3

3.0 bar 0° 90° 10.0

3.5 bar 0° 90° 11.6

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 4.9 3.4 6.6 5.1 8.3 6.8 9.9 8.4 4.3 2.5 5.9 4.1 7.6 5.8 9.3 7.4 5.3 3.1 6.9 4.8 8.6 6.5 6.2 3.8 7.9 5.5 7.2 4.5

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 14.0

4.5 bar 0° 90° 15.0

5.0 bar 0° 90° 16.6

5.5 bar 0° 90° 18.3

6.0 bar 0° 90° 19.9

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 13.3

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

50

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 10.6 9.1 9.9 8.1 9.2 7.1 8.6 6.2 7.9 5.2

4.5 bar 0° 90° 11.6 10.1 10.9 9.1 10.2 8.1 9.6 7.2 8.9 6.2 8.2 5.2

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.20 D 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.30

0.09

0.15

5.0 bar 0° 90° 13.2 11.7 12.6 10.8 11.9 9.8 11.2 8.8 10.6 7.8 9.9 6.9 9.2 5.9

5.5 bar 0° 90° 14.2 13.6 12.9 12.2 11.5 10.9 10.2

12.4 11.5 10.5 9.5 8.5 7.6 6.6

6.0 bar 0° 90°

15.2 14.6 13.9 13.2 12.5 11.9

13.1 12.1 11.2 10.2 9.2 8.2

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.15.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 051

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 126 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.16  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 101 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 101DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 14.7

3.0 bar 0° 90° 17.6

3.5 bar 0° 90° 20.5

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 9.1 6.2 12.0 9.2 15.0 12.1 17.9 15 8.0 4.5 10.9 7.5 13.9 10.4 16.8 13.3 9.8 5.8 12.8 8.7 15.7 11.6 11.6 7 14.6 10.0 13.5 8.3

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 24.6

4.5 bar 0° 90° 26.4

5.0 bar 0° 90° 29.3

5.5 bar 0° 90° 32

6.0 bar 0° 90° 35.2

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 23.5

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

63

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 19.1 16.2 18.0 14.5 16.9 12.8 15.7 11.1 15.0 9.4

4.5 bar 0° 90° 20.8 17.9 19.7 16.3 18.6 14.6 17.5 12.9 16.4 11.2 15.3 9.5

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.25 D 0.30 S 0.30 S 0.35

0.16

0.26

5.0 bar 0° 90° 23.8 20.9 22.7 19.2 21.5 17.5 20.4 15.8 19.3 14.1 18.2 12.4 17.1 10.8

25.6 24.5 23.4 22.3 21.1 20.0 18.9

22.1 20.4 18.7 17.1 15.4 13.7 12

27.4 26.3 25.2 24.1 23 21.9

23.4 21.7 20.0 18.3 16.6 14.9

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.16.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 101

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 127 of 292

9.2.27.17  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 201 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 201DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 29.1

3.0 bar 0° 90° 34.9

3.5 bar 0° 90° 40.7

2.5 bar 0° 90° 18.0 11.8 15.8 8.3

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 48.9

4.5 bar 0° 90° 52.4

5.0 bar 0° 90° 58.2

5.5 bar 0° 90° 64

6.0 bar 0° 90° 69.8

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 46.5

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 23.8 17.6 21.6 14.1 19.4 10.7

3.5 bar 0° 90° 29.7 23.4 27.5 19.9 25.2 16.5 23.0 13.0

4.0 bar 0° 90° 35.5 29.2 33.3 25.8 31.1 22.3 28.8 18.8 26.6 15.4

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

75

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 37.8 31.6 35.6 28.1 33.4 24.6 31.2 21.2 29.0 17.7

4.5 bar 0° 90° 41.3 35.0 39.1 31.6 36.9 28.1 34.7 24.7 32.5 21.2 30.2 17.7

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.30 D 0.35 S 0.40 S 0.50

0.31

0.49

5.0 bar 0° 90° 47.1 40.9 44.9 37.4 42.7 33.9 40.5 30.5 38.3 27.0 36.1 23.6 33.8 20.1

50.7 48.5 46.3 44.1 41.9 39.7 37.5

43.2 39.8 36.3 32.8 29.4 25.9 22.4

54.3 52.1 49.9 47.7 45.5 43.3

45.6 42.1 38.6 35.2 31.7 28.3

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.17.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 201

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 128 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.18  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 251 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 251DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 45.8

3.0 bar 0° 90° 54.9

3.5 bar 0° 90° 64.1

2.5 bar 0° 90° 27.4 16.9 23.8 11.1

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 76.9

4.5 bar 0° 90° 82.4

5.0 bar 0° 90° 91.5

5.5 bar 0° 90° 101.0

6.0 bar 0° 90° 110.0

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 73.2

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 36.6 26.0 32.9 20.3 29.2 14.5

3.5 bar 0° 90° 45.7 35.2 42.1 29.4 38.4 23.6 34.7 17.9

4.0 bar 0° 90° 54.9 44.3 51.2 38.6 47.5 32.8 43.9 27.0 40.2 21.2

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

88

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 58.5 48.0 54.9 42.2 51.2 36.4 47.5 30.7 43.9 24.9

4.5 bar 0° 90° 64.0 53.5 60.4 47.7 56.7 41.9 53.0 36.2 49.4 30.4 45.7 24.6

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.40 D 0.50 S 0.50 S 0.60

0.51

0.78

5.0 bar 0° 90° 73.2 62.6 69.5 56.9 65.8 51.1 62.2 45.3 58.5 39.5 54.8 33.8 51.2 28

78.7 75.0 71.3 67.7 64.0 60.3 56.7

66.0 60.2 54.5 48.7 42.9 37.1 31.4

84.2 80.5 76.8 73.1 69.5 65.8

69.4 63.6 57.8 52.1 46.3 40.5

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.18.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 251

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 129 of 292

9.2.27.19  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 301 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 301DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 66.5

3.0 bar 0° 90° 79.8

3.5 bar 0° 90° 93.1

2.5 bar 0° 90° 41.1 27.1 36.1 19.2

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 112

4.5 bar 0° 90° 120

5.0 bar 0° 90° 133

5.5 bar 0° 90° 146

6.0 bar 0° 90° 160

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 106

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 54.4 40.4 49.4 32.5 44.3 24.6

3.5 bar 0° 90° 67.7 53.7 62.7 45.8 57.6 37.9 52.5 30.0

4.0 bar 0° 90° 81.0 67.0 76.0 59.1 70.9 51.2 65.8 43.3 60.8 35.5

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

100

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 86.3 72.3 81.3 64.4 76.2 56.5 71.1 48.7 66.0 40.8

4.5 bar 0° 90° 94.3 80.3 89.3 72.4 84.2 64.5 79.1 56.6 74.0 48.8 69.0 40.9

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.50 D 0.60 S 0.70 S 0.90

0.71

1.11

5.0 bar 0° 90° 108 93.6 103 85.7 97.5 77.8 92.4 69.9 87.3 62.1 82.3 54.2 77.2 46.3

116 111 106 101 95.6 90.5 85.4

99.0 91.1 83.2 75.3 67.5 59.6 51.7

124 119 114 109 104 98.7

104 96.5 88.6 80.8 72.9 65.0

Operating Temperature °C 2) HT STD LT (high

(standard)

temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.19.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 301

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 130 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.20  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 351 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 351DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 107

3.0 bar 0° 90° 129

3.5 bar 0° 90° 150

2.5 bar 0° 90° 66.5 41.9 58.3 28.8

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 181

4.5 bar 0° 90° 193

5.0 bar 0° 90° 215

5.5 bar 0° 90° 236

6.0 bar 0° 90° 258

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 172

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 87.9 63.4 79.7 50.3 71.5 37.2

3.5 bar 0° 90° 109 84.9 101 71.8 93.0 58.7 84.8 45.6

4.0 bar 0° 90° 131 106 123 93.3 115 80.2 106 67.1 98.1 54.0

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

115

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 140 115 131 102 123 88.8 115 75.7 107 62.6

4.5 bar 0° 90° 152 128 144 115 136 102 128 88.6 120 75.5 111 62.4

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.70 D 0.80 S 0.90 S 1.10

1.19

1.80

5.0 bar 0° 90° 174 149 166 136 158 123 149 110 141 97.0 133 83.9 125 70.8

187 179 171 163 154 146 138

158 145 132 118 105 92.3 79.2

200 192 184 176 168 159

166 153 140 127 114 101

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2) For

HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.20.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 351

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 131 of 292

9.2.27.21  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 401 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 401DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 138

3.0 bar 0° 90° 166

3.5 bar 0° 90° 194

2.5 bar 0° 90° 86 56.1 75.5 39.6

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 233

4.5 bar 0° 90° 249

5.0 bar 0° 90° 277

5.5 bar 0° 90° 305

6.0 bar 0° 90° 332

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 222

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 114 83.8 103 67.3 92.7 50.8

3.5 bar 0° 90° 141 111 131 95 120 78.5 110 62

4.0 bar 0° 90° 169 139 159 123 148 106 138 89.7 127 73.3

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

125

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 180 150 170 134 159 117 149 101 138 84.3

4.5 bar 0° 90° 197 167 186 150 176 134 165 117 155 101 144 84.5

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 0.90 D 1.10 S 1.20 S 1.40

1.54

2.34

5.0 bar 0° 90° 224 195 214 178 203 162 193 145 182 129 172 112 161 95.7

242 231 221 210 200 189 179

206 189 173 156 140 123 107

259 248 238 227 217 206

217 201 184 168 151 135

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.21.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 401

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 132 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.22  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 451 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 451DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 217

3.0 bar 0° 90° 261

3.5 bar 0° 90° 304

2.5 bar 0° 90° 135 88.6 119 62,8

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 365

4.5 bar 0° 90° 391

5.0 bar 0° 90° 435

5.5 bar 0° 90° 478

6.0 bar 0° 90° 522

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 348

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 0° 90° 179 132 162 106 146 80,5

3.5 bar 0° 90° 222 176 206 150 189 124 173 98.2

4.0 bar 0° 90° 265 219 249 193 233 167 216 142 200 116

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

145

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 283 236 266 211 250 185 233 159 217 133

4.5 bar 0° 90° 309 262 293 237 276 211 260 185 243 159 227 134

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 1.20 D 1.40 S 1.50 S 1.80

2.41

3.78

5.0 bar 0° 90° 352 306 336 280 320 254 303 229 287 203 270 177 254 151

379 363 347 330 314 297 281

324 298 272 246 221 195 169

406 390 374 357 341 324

341 316 290 264 238 213

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.22.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 451

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 133 of 292

9.2.27.23  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 501 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 501DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 284

3.0 bar 0° 90° 340

3.5 bar 0° 90° 397

2.5 bar 0° 90° 171 118 149 84,3

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 477

4.5 bar 0° 90° 511

5.0 bar 0° 90° 567

5.5 bar 0° 90° 624

6.0 bar 0° 90° 681

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 454

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 228 174 285 231 342 288 206 141 262 198 319 255 183 108 240 165 297 221 218 131 274 188 252 155

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

160

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 364 310 342 277 319 244 297 211 275 178

4.5 bar 0° 90° 398 344 376 311 353 278 331 245 309 212 286 178

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 1.50 D 1.7 S 1.80 S

2.1

3.14

4.92

5.0 bar 0° 90° 455 401 433 368 410 335 388 302 365 268 343 235 320 202

489 467 444 422 400 377 355

425 391 358 325 292 259 225

524 501 479 456 434 411

448 415 382 349 315 282

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.23.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 501

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 134 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.24  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 551 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 551DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 383

3.0 bar 0° 90° 459

3.5 bar 0° 90° 536

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 225 146 301 223 378 299 455 376 193 99 270 175 346 252 423 329 238 128 315 205 391 281 283 157 360 234 328 186

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 643

4.5 bar 0° 90° 689

5.0 bar 0° 90° 766

5.5 bar 0° 90° 842

6.0 bar 0° 90° 919

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 613

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

180

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 485 406 454 359 422 312 390 264 359 217

4.5 bar 0° 90° 531 452 500 405 468 358 436 310 405 263 373 216

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 2.00 D 2.20 S 2.40 S 2.80

4.26

6.89

5.0 bar 0° 90° 608 529 576 482 544 434 513 387 481 340 450 292 418 245

653 621 589 558 526 495 463

558 511 464 416 369 321 274

698 666 634 603 571 540

587 540 493 445 398 351

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.24.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 551

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 135 of 292

9.2.27.25  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 601 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 601DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 532

3.0 bar 0° 90° 638

3.5 bar 0° 90° 745

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 319 217 426 323 532 430 638 536 277 154 383 260 489 367 596 473 341 197 447 304 553 410 404 241 511 347 468 284

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 893

4.5 bar 0° 90° 957

5.0 bar 0° 90° 1064

5.5 bar 0° 90° 1170

6.0 bar 0° 90° 1276

5.5 bar 0° 90°

6.0 bar 0° 90°

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 851

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

200

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 681 578 638 515 596 453 553 390 511 327

4.5 bar 0° 90° 745 642 702 579 660 516 617 453 575 390 532 327

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 2.70 D 3.20 S 3.50 S 4.00

5.94

9.46

5.0 bar 0° 90° 851 749 808 686 766 623 723 560 681 497 638 434 596 371

915 872 830 787 745 702 660

792 729 666 603 540 477 414

979 936 894 851 809 766

835 772 709 646 583 520

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.25.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 601

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 136 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.26  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 651 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 651DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 893

3.0 bar 0° 90° 1072

3.5 bar 0° 90° 1251

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 533 372 712 551 890 730 1069 908 461 268 640 447 818 625 997 804 568 343 746 521 925 700 674 417 853 596 781 491

S 05 S 06 S 07 S 08 S 09 S 10 S 11 S 12 S = Springs

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

4.2 bar 0° 90° 1501

4.5 bar 0° 90° 1608

5.0 bar 0° 90° 1787

5.5 bar 0° 90° 1966

6.0 bar 0° 90° 2144

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type Pressure

4.0 bar 0° 90° 1430

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

240

1)

4.2 bar 0° 90° 1141 980 1068 876 996 771 924 667 852 563

4.5 bar 5.0 bar 5.5 bar 6.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 1248 1087 1426 1266 1176 983 1354 1162 1533 1340 1104 879 1282 1057 1461 1236 1640 1415 1032 774 1210 953 1389 1132 1568 1310 959 670 1138 849 1317 1028 1495 1206 887 566 1066 745 1245 923 1423 1102 994 640 1173 819 1351 998 1101 715 1279 894

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 3.5 D 4.0 S 4.1

S

4.6

10

15.2

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.26.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 651

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 137 of 292

9.2.27.27  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 701 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 701DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 1297

3.0 bar 0° 90° 1556

3.5 bar 0° 90° 1815

4.0 bar 0° 90° 2075

4.2 bar 0° 90° 2179

4.5 bar 0° 90° 2334

5.0 bar 0° 90° 2594

5.5 bar 0° 90° 2853

6.0 bar 0° 90° 3112

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 4.2 bar 4.5 bar 5.0 bar 5.5 bar 6.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° S 05 751 496 1011 755 1270 1015 1529 1274 1633 1378 1789 1533 2048 1793 S 06 642 336 902 595 1161 854 1420 1114 1524 1217 1680 1373 1939 1632 2198 1892 S 07 792 435 1052 694 1311 954 1415 1057 1570 1213 1830 1472 2089 1732 2349 1991 S 08 943 534 1202 793 1306 897 1461 1053 1721 1312 1980 1571 2239 1831 S 09 1093 633 1197 737 1352 893 1612 1152 1871 1411 2130 1671 S 10 1243 732 1503 992 1762 1251 2021 1510 S 11 1393 832 1653 1091 1912 1350 S 12 1544 931 1803 1190 S = Springs

Pressure

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

265

1)

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 4.0 D 4.0 S 4.5

S

4.5

14.5

21.38

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.27.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 701

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 138 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.28  Pneumatic actuator Model AT 801 (A extract from the technical data sheet No AT 801DM) Output torque for double acting in Nm

Type Pressure D

2.5 bar 0° 90° 2252

3.0 bar 0° 90° 2703

3.5 bar 0° 90° 3153

4.0 bar 0° 90° 3604

4.2 bar 0° 90° 3784

4.5 bar 0° 90° 4054

5.0 bar 0° 90° 4504

5.5 bar 0° 90° 4955

6.0 bar 0° 90° 5405

Output torque for spring return in Nm

Type

2.5 bar 3.0 bar 3.5 bar 4.0 bar 4.2 bar 4.5 bar 5.0 bar 5.5 bar 6.0 bar 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° 0° 90° S 05 1332 1014 1783 1465 2233 1915 2684 2365 2864 2546 3134 2816 3585 3266 S 06 1149 767 1599 1217 2049 1667 2500 2118 2680 2298 2950 2568 3401 3019 3851 3469 S 07 1415 969 1865 1420 2316 1870 2496 2050 2766 2321 3217 2771 3667 3222 4118 3672 S 08 1682 1172 2132 1623 2312 1803 2582 2073 3033 2524 3483 2974 3934 3424 S 09 1948 1375 2128 1555 2398 1825 2849 2276 3299 2726 3750 3177 S 10 2215 1578 2665 2028 3115 2479 3566 2929 S 11 2481 1781 2931 2231 3382 2682 S 12 2748 1983 3198 2434 S = Springs

Pressure

Max. Rotation Pressure

8.0 bar

90 ±4° At 0° and 90°

Chamber Moving Time ∅ mm

330

1)

Air Volume (liter)

Opening Closing Opening Closing D 6.0 D 7.0 S 7.5

S

8.5

25

40

Operating Temperature °C 2) STD

HT

LT

(standard)

(high temperature)

(low temperature)

NBR O-Ring

FPM O-Ring

Silicone O-Ring

-20 to +80

-15 to +150

-40 to +80

Notes: 1)

The above indicated moving time of the actuator, am obtained in the following test conditions:

„„ Room Temperature, „„ Actuator Stroke 90°, „„ Solenoid Valve with orifice of 4 mm and a flow capacity Qn = 400 L/min., „„ Inside pipe diameter 8 mm, „„ Medium clean air, „„ Air supply pressure 5.5 bar (79.75 Psi), „„ Actuator without external resistance load.

Cautions: Obviously on the field applications when one or more of the above parameter are different, the moving time will be different. 2)

For HT (high temperature) and LT (low temperature) services, a special Lubricant is requested. Please contact Air Torque factory.

Operating Medium: The operating medium must be free of dust and oil. The maximum particle size must not exceed 30 μm (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 5). In order to prevent water condensation and/or solidification (Ice, when actuator work below 0°C), the operating medium must have a dew point equal to -20°C or, at least 10°C below the ambient temperature (ISO 8573 Part 1, Class 3). Recommended size Table 9.2.27.28.-1:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Model AT 801

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 139 of 292

9.2.27.29  Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator Components

A

Alodur (Special hard anodized) Body Color: Bright Stainless steel

End-caps

Chromatized + Polyester Coated Color: S.S. Ral 9007 or Blue Ral 5015

Drive shaft Carbon Steel ENP1) Pistons

Normal Anodized Color: Black

Suitable for: „„ General service

B

C

Alodur + PTFE coating Color: Light grey

ENP+ Polyester transparent coated Color: Bright Stainless steel

Chromatized + Polyester Coated Color: S.S. Ral 9007 or Blue Ral 5015

Chromatized + Polyester Coated Color: S.S. Ral 9007

Carbon Steel ENP1)

Carbon Steel ENP1)

Normal Anodized Color: Black

Normal Anodized Color: Black

„„ General service „„ Acids or basic solutions in low concentration

„„ Caustic Soda „„ Nitric acid Not recommended „„ All strong acids or „„ N-Methyle for: basic solutions Pirolidone (solvent)

„„ General service „„ Caustic soda in low concentration „„ Nitric acid „„ Chlorine, sulfuric and salted environment

Salt Spray Test Certif. N°

SAC/655/98

SAC/656/98

SAC/892/96

Kesternick Test Certif. N°

SAC/299/98

SAC/300/98

SAC/895/96

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.27.29.-1:  Protection Levels Available for Type A, B, and C 1) ENP = Electroless nickel coating High Phosphorous content P>10%

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 140 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.27.30  Protections Levels for 4th Generation Actuator

D

E

P

Body

Alodur + PTFE coating Color: Light grey

Alodur + PTFE coating Color: Light grey

Alodur (special hard anodized) Color: Bright Stainless steel

End-caps

Chromatized + PTFE coating Color: Light grey

Chromatized + PTFE coating Color: Light grey

Resin Impregnated + Hard Anodized Color: Dark gray

Stainless Steel 303 (Option 316)

Carbon Steel ENP1)

Normal Anodized Color: Black

Normal Anodized Color: Black

Normal Anodized Color: Black

„„ General service „„ Acids or basic Suitable for: solutions in low concentration

„„ General service „„ Acids or basic solutions in low concentration

„„ General service „„ Suggested for any kind of solve

„„ Nitric acid „„ N-Methyle Pirolidone (solvent)

„„ Caustic soda „„ All strong acids or basic solutions

Components

Drive shaft Carbon Steel ENP1) Pistons

„„ Nitric acid Not recommended „„ N-Methyle for: Pirolidone (solvent) Salt Spray Test Certif. N°

SAC/890/96

SAC/886/96

SAC/304/98

Kesternick Test Certif. N°

SAC/896/96

SAC/897/96

SAC/301/98

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.27.30.-1:  Protection Levels Available for Type D, E, and P 1) ENP = Electroless nickel coating High Phosphorous content P>10%

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 141 of 292

9.2.27.31  Full compliance with worldwide specifications AIR TORQUE 4th Generation actuator are designed in full compliance with the latest worldwide specifications relating to the actuator accessory and valve mounting interfaces. Bottom mounting pad (Actuator to valve interface) configured in accordance with ISO 5211 and DIN 3337 specifications Full compliance with worldwide specifications „„ ISO 5211 and DIN 3337 configuration permits easy installation of the actuator directly onto a valve or will interface through an ISO bracket. ISO gear boxes. „„ AIR TORQUE can supply all mounting kits i.e. Assorted Square drive reducer pieces suitable for all square drive shaft, Centering rings for all sizes, Brackets and Couplings. „„ Other than the standard bottom ISO/DIN Parallel or Diagonal square output on the drive shaft connection, we can supply a Keyed connection, Flat head connection or special customized drive connections. Top mounting pad configuration is in accordance with VDI/VDE 3845 Namur specification in order to permit simple and easy installation of the ancillary like switch boxes and positioners. AIR TORQUE can supply many different types of switch boxes and positioners for any application.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 142 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Full compliance with worldwide specifications Air supply connection is in accordance with VDI/VDE 3845 Namur specification to provide simple and easy solenoid valve installation, direct mount avoiding piping and fittings. AIR TORQUE can also supply Namur solenoid valves: 5/2 and 3/2 way in all standard voltages, D.C. or A.C.

2

4

2

3

5 1

5/2 SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

3 1

3/2 SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

Adapter for magnetoresistive AMR sensor for Electronic Limit switch Type 3738 with enhanced diagnostics.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

9.2.27.32  Company Approvals „„ ISO 9001-2000 „„ GOST RUSSIA (AVAILABLE ON REQUEST) Products Approvals/Compliance/Certificates „„ Gost standard Russia (available on request) „„ DET NORSKE VERITAS TYPE APPROVAL „„ 94/9/EC ATEX „„ IP 67 enclosure protection - EN 60529 „„ Salt spray “fog” corrosion test - ISO 9227 (available on request) „„ Kesternich corrosion test ISO 3231 (available on request) Patents „„ Air torque actuators are covered by many international patents . Rack and pinion actuators Advantages: „„ Very simple and robust. „„ Suitable up to the highest air supply pressures. „„ Compact physical size in spite of long travels (angle of rotation). „„ Economical for small actuator thrusts (torques). „„ Proven reliability at high and low temperatures. Disadvantages: „„ Generally inadequate thrust (torque) at spring-return action. „„ Inevitable leakage after long working hours. „„ Higher friction and hysteresis compared to diaphragm actuators. „„ Expensive for high thrusts (torques) and normal pressures.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 143 of 292

Page 144 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.28.  Rotary Actuator Type 3278 Single-acting pneumatic rotary diaphragm actuator for butterfly valves and other final control elements with rotary closure members. Suitable for throttling and on/off service, Maximum opening angle Φ = 90°. „„ Powerful torque and high speed of response „„ Operating direction (spring opens/ spring closes) can be customized „„ Various bench ranges „„ Extremly adjustable stop screws to limit the opening angle „„ Maximum angle of rotation (opening angle) Φ = 90° „„ Designed for supply pressures up to 6 bar / 90 psi „„ Service temperatures from -35 to + 90 °C / „„ Connections according to DIN ISO 5211 „„ Actuator shaft available in three diffrent diameters depending on the actuator size „„ Optional attachment of positioners, (limit switches, solenoid valve and accessories) „„ User-selectable actuator action „„ Effective diaphragm area 160 and 320 cm2 „„ With Handwheel or without Handwheel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cover plate Diaphragm Housing Springs Actuator stem Lever stem Actuator shaft Stop screws Handwheel Figure 9.2.28.-1:  Pneumatic Rotary Actuator Type 3278

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Bench range bar

0.4 to 0.8 1)

0.5 to 1.0

0.8 to 1.6

0.9 to 1.8 1)

1.2 to 2.4

1.3 to 2.6 1)

1.7 to 3.4

Opening angle

Page 145 of 292

Unable spring torques M in Nm at diaphragm area cm2 160 cm2 320 cm2

0°

10

32

15°/20°

15

49

90°

21

67

Mmax

24

85

0°

12

40

15°/20°

19

61

90°

23

85

Mmax

28

115

0°

20

64

15°/20°

30

97

90°

42

132

Mmax

50

175

0°

22

72

15°/20°

34

109

90°

47

153

Mmax

55

200

0°

30

96

15°/20°

45

145

90°

63

200

Mmax

77

265

0°

32

104

15°/20°

48

157

90°

67

218

Mmax

82

285

0°

42

136

15°/20°

63

206

90°

89

286

Mmax

107

375

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. 1)

Special range

Table 9.2.28.-2:  Usable spring torques - all pressures in bar (gauge)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 146 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.29.  Pneumatic actuators of company Pfeiffer-Armaturen GmbH

Multi - Turn Actuator Type BR 30a

Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a (AT=Air Torque)

Member of SAMSON Group

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 147 of 292

9.2.29.1  Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a Application Single-acting pneumatic rotary diaphragm actuator for butterfly valves and other final control elements with rotary closure members. Maximum opening angle ϕ = 93° The Type BR 30a Pneumatic Rotary Actuators are equipped with a rolling diaphragm and a central return spring. Special features „„ Effective diaphragm areas from 600 to 1300 cm2 „„ Torques from 15 to 5619 Nm „„ Signal pressure up to max. 6 bar „„ Various bench ranges possible through continuously adjustable spring compression or variation of the springs „„ No special tools needed to change the bench range „„ Direction of action (spring opens/closes) depends on attachment to the valve „„ Externally adjustable stop screws to limit the opening angle „„ For continuous operation at temperatures from −35 to 90 °C Attachment of positioner, limit switch, solenoid valve, and other accessories possible. Figure 9.2.29.1.-1:  Multi - Turn Actuator - Pfeiffer Type BR 30a

Actuator Type Version Spring position Opening angles Travel mm Diaphragm area cm2 Spring range bar

BR 30a Diaphragm Multi-spring, symmetric 90° 55 to 120 60 to 1300 2.5 to 6 bar

Spring torque Nm 16 to 4127 Temperature range – 35 to +90 °C / – 31 to +194 °F For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.29.1.-2:  Technical data of pneumatic actuator Single-acting Type BR30a

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 148 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.29.2  Additional equipment and add-on pieces: For the actuators, the following accessories are available either individually or in combination: „„ Positioner „„ Limit switch „„ Solenoid valves „„ Air supply stations „„ Pressure gauge set Further accessories are available on request for customer specifications. Details on request.

Torque (Nm) 350 300 Air torque MdL

250 200 150

Spring torque MdF

100 50 0

Opening angle (°) 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

Figure 9.2.29.2.-1:  Example illustrating the torque characteristic Actuator size 3 with spring 1 at 2.5 bar supply pressure

Pfeiffer Type BR 30a Rotary Diaphragm Actuator Type BR 30a Size 0 1 2 3 4 Effective cm2 60 105 125 240 470 diaphragm area Travel mm 55 60 90 Opening angle ϕ 90° For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

5

6

780

1300

Table 9.2.29.2.-2:  Technical data for Type BR 30a Rotary Diaphragm Actuator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

120

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 149 of 292

9.2.29.3  Pfeiffer AT - Quarter-Turn Actuator Series BR31a Application: Single- or double-acting piston actuator for control and shutoff valves with rotating flow restrictor, especially with high process demand in chemical plants: „„ Quarter turn 90° „„ Air supply to 10 bar „„ Temperatures -20°C to 80°C The pneumatic quarter-turn actuators Figure 9.2.29.3.-1:  Pfeiffer AT- Quarter Turn Actuator Series 31a, Type SRP 220 Type SRP and DAP are piston actuators for control or OPEN / CLOSED operation. The actuators distinguish themselves by: „„ Externally adjustable end stops (±4°) „„ Square position diagonal (Europe. Standard) or parallel „„ Freely-adjustable position indicator (in 45° steps) „„ Assembly and modification without special tools „„ Encapsulated spring assembly „„ Transmission through involute gearing „„ Direction of rotation reversible without additional components „„ Proven surface refinement by means of Kesternich and salt spray test „„ Connection of additional equipment according to VDI VDE 3845 „„ Attachments according to DIN ISO 5211 Versions: „„ Type SRP Pneumatic quarter-turn actuator, single-acting with spring-return mechanism in the sizes 15 to 10000. „„ Type DAP Pneumatic quarter-turn actuator, double-acting without spring-return mechanism in the sizes 6 to 10000. Special designs: „„ With emergency manual actuation „„ For continuous operation at temperatures from -20° to 150°C through use of Viton O-rings „„ For continuous operation at temperatures from -40° to 80°C with silicon seals

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 150 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

„„ Actuators with extended turning range 120° and 180° „„ Dosage actuator with adjustable central position „„ 3-position actuator „„ Actuator with hydraulic adjustment of rotating speed „„ Stainless steel AT quarter-turn actuator 9.2.29.4  Additional equipment and add-on pieces: For the actuators, the following accessories are available either individually or in combination: „„ Positioner „„ Limit switch „„ Solenoid valves „„ Air supply stations „„ Pressure gauge set „„ Throttling device Further accessories are available on request for customer specifications. Details on request.

Figure 9.2.29.4.-1:  Pfeiffer AT - Quarter Turn Actuator Series 31a, Type SRP 5000

9.2.29.5  Safety position: „„ For the actuator Type SRP two different directions of rotation are possible, becoming effective by release pressure on the pistons or in the case of air supply failure. The viewing direction is from the actuator to the valve. Springs rotating to the right In case of pressure loss, rotation to the right. Springs rotating to the left In case of pressure loss, rotation to the left. „„ The actuator Type DAP is designed without springs. A defined final position is not achieved in the case of air supply failure.

Figure 9.2.29.5.-1:  Pfeiffer - Stainless Steel Ball Valve BR 26 with Actuator Type SRP 5000

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 151 of 292

General technical data of Pfeiffer AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2) Operation Max. perm. air supply pressure

Single-acting

Double-acting 10 bar 6 • 15 • 30 • 60 • 100 • 150 • 220 Size 300 • 450 • 600 • 900 • 1200 2000 • 3000 • 5000 • 10000 Perm. temperature range Continuous operation -20°C to 80°C Connection to valve DIN ISO 5211 Type 15 to 150 VDI VDE 3845, Size 1 VDI VDE 3845, Size 2 Connection for positioner Type 220 to 600 or signal equipment Type 900 to 5000 VDI VDE 3845, Size 4 Type 10000 VDI VDE 3845, Size 5 Connection for solenoid valve VDI VDE 3845 For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.29.5.-2:  General technical data for Series BR31a

9.2.29.6  Air drive torque Figure 9.2.29.6.-1 shows the available air drive torque „„ MdLE for the single-acting version „„ MdLD for the double-acting version and the available spring drive moment MdF in relation to the angle of rotation. The course of the operating torque is valid for the correct combination of the respective air supply pressure with the right number of springs. MdLD

100 %

ca. 66 %

MdF

ca. 33 %

MdLE

0% 0°

45°

90°

Figure 9.2.29.6.-1:  Course of operating torque at recommended air inlet pressure

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 152 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.30.  Pneumatic actuators of company VETEC Ventiltechnik GmbH

Model R

Model AT

Model MZ

Model MD

Model MN

Model S

Member of SAMSON Group

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 153 of 292

9.2.30.1  Diaphragm or rotary actuators R

AT

MN

Version

Rolling diaphragm

Piston

Diaphragm

Size

R110, R150, R200, R250, R250V

SC/SO - 60, 100, 150, 220, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 2000, 3000, 5000

MN200, MN300

Actuator Type

Travel

128 to 200 mm

40 to 52 mm

Opening angle

75°

75°

Pivoting angle 75°

Spring position

Centrally arranged spring

Multi-spring, symmetric

Centrally arranged spring

Diaphragm area

85 to 470 cm2

36 to 2500 cm2

298 to 678 cm2

Spring torques

26 to 750 Nm

13 to 865 Nm

35 to 130 Nm

3 to 6 bar

3 to 6 bar

3 bar to 4 bar

Ambient temperature range

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

Mounting of accessories

VDI/VDE 3845

VDI/VDE 3845

VDI/VDE 3845

R250, R250V

SC 60, 100, 150, 220, 300, 450, 600, 900, 1200, 2000, 3000, 5000

Manual gear cannot be mounted

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

Supply air range

Shaft of manual gear for Type Manual gear for Type

Attachment type A Attachment type B Attachment type C Attachment type D

R110, R150, R250

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.30.1.-1:  Diaphragm or rotary actuators Type R. AT and MN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 154 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Diaphragm or rotary actuators MZ

MD

S

Diaphragm

Diaphragm

Diaphragm

Size

MZ450, MZ700

MD450, MD700

S160, S320

Travel

100 to 130 mm

100 to 130 mm

29 to 54 mm

Opening angle

75°

75° to 90°

75°

Spring position

Centrally arranged spring

Multi-spring, symmetric

Centrally arranged spring

Diaphragm area

1650 to 3580 cm2

1610 to 3390 cm2

160 to 320 cm²

605 to 2210 Nm

885 to 8750 Nm

43 to 165 Nm

3 to 4 bar

3 to 6 bar

3 to 6 bar

Ambient temperature range

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

-40 to +80 °C -40 to +176 °F

Mounting of accessories

VDI/VDE 3845

VDI/VDE 3845

VDI/VDE 3845

MZ450, MZ700

MD450, MD700

S160, S320

Actuator Type Version

Spring torques Supply air range

Shaft of manual gear for Type Manual gear for Type

FTC - ATO

Attachment type A Attachment type B

FTO - ATC FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTC - ATO

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

FTO - ATC

Attachment type C Attachment type D

FTC - ATO FTO - ATC FTC - ATO FTO - ATC

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.30.1.-2:  Diaphragm or rotary actuators Type MZ, MD and S

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 155 of 292

9.2.30.2  Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position: Direction of flow FTC = Flow To Close The flowing medium wants to close the control valve. FTO = Flow To Open The flowing medium wants to open the control valve.

FTC = FLOW TO CLOSE Medium closes

FTO = FLOW TO OPEN Medium opens

Actuator action AIR TO OPEN (ATO) = Spring closes When the signal pressure is reduced or the air supply fails, the springs move the actuator stem and close the valve. The valve opens when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force exerted by the springs. AIR TO CLOSE (ATC) = Spring opens When the signal pressure is reduced or the air supply fails, the springs move the actuator stem and open the valve. The valve closes when the signal pressure is increased enough to overcome the force exerted by the springs. Fail-safe position The control valve offers two possible fail-safe positions in combination with the Diaphragm Actuator in case the supply air fails: „„ Valve CLOSED without supply air; the Rotary Plug Valve is closed when the supply air fails. „„ Valve OPEN without supply air; the Rotary Plug Valve is opened when the supply air fails. Table 9.2.30.2.-1:  Direction of flow, Actuator action, and Fail-safe position

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 156 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.31.  VETEC Actuator Type R (rolling diaphragm or rotary actuator) VETEC Actuator Type R Actuator Type R

Sectional drawing of Type R

Type R Actuator with mounted positioner with shaft of manual gear

Type R Actuator with mounted positioner with manual gear

Attachment Type A: Air to open (ATO) → Spring-closes

Attachment Type A: Air to close (ATC) → Spring-opens

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 157 of 292

VETEC Actuator Type R Attachment Type B: Air to open (ATO) → Spring-closes

Attachment Type B: Air to close (ATC) → Spring-opens

Attachment Type C: Air to open (ATO) → Spring-closes

Attachment Type C: Air to close (ATC) → Spring-opens

Attachment Type D: Air to open (ATO) → Spring-closes

Attachment Type D: Air to close (ATC) → Spring-opens

Figure 9.2.31.-1:  Manual gears and the different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type R

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 158 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.31.1  Principle of operation: The Type R Actuator is equipped with a rolling diaphragm and a centrally arranged return spring on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the lever for the valve shaft. The very long travel ensures high torques and very fine control. Its design allows the actuator to be used on valves or butterfly valves with different opening angles. The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. Actuator Type

R110

R150

Version

R250V

Centrally arranged spring 128 85

184 165

75° 200 295

200 470

0.4 to 1.2

Spring range bar Spring torque Nm Supply air range Temperature range Manual gear

R250

Diaphragm

Spring position Opening angles Travel mm Diaphragm area cm2

R200

26

73

200 470 1.3 to 2.4

144 230 747 3 to 6 bar – 20 to +70 °C or – 4 to +158 °F Shaft of manual gear Manual gear

Application: High torques (1000 Nm), high turn down ratios, fine tuning and controlability, severe applications.

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.31.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuators Type R110 to R250V

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 159 of 292

Differential pressure ∆p for Actuators Type R110 to R250V DN 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 NPS 1 1½ 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 Actuator Type R110 R150 R200 Spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar Direction of flow ∆p in bar and actuator action FTO - ATO 60.0 30.0 14.8 15.0 7.7 7.0 3.8 2.7 1.6 FTC - ATC 141 83.8 41.3 31.7 16.3 14.2 7.8 5.4 3.2 FTO - ATC 367 233 115 78.0 40.2 34.2 18.7 12.9 7.8 FTC - ATO 124 64.1 54.2 29.6 20.5 12.3 Actuator Type R150 R200 R250 Spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar FTO - ATO 137 81.2 40.0 29.0 15.0 11.0 6.0 4.2 2.5 FTC - ATC 148 66.4 34.3 23.7 12.9 9.0 5.4 FTO - ATC 156 80.6 55.6 30.3 21.0 12.6 FTC - ATO 246 127 87.4 47.7 33.0 19.9 Actuator Type R200 R250 R250V Spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar 1.3 to 2.4 bar FTO - ATO 276.0 136.1 51.9 26.8 39.7 21.7 15.0 9.0 FTC - ATC 109 56.2 FTO - ATC 130 17.4 9.5 6.6 3.9 FTC - ATO 204 49.2 26.8 18.6 11.2 For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

For Rotary Plug Valves: Type 73.3, 73.7

Supply Air 2.0 bar 2.0 bar 3.0 bar 4.0 bar

2.0 bar 2.0 bar 3.0 bar 4.0 bar

2.0 bar 2.0 bar 3.0 bar 4.0 bar

Table 9.2.31.1.-2:  Differential pressure ∆p for Actuators Type R110 to R250V

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 160 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.32.  VETEC Actuator Type AT (Rack and Piston actuator) VETEC Actuator Type AT

(AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2)

Actuator Type AT

Sectional drawing of Type AT

Type AT Actuator with mounted positioner Attachment Type A

Type AT Actuator with mounted positioner with manual gear

Attachment Type A

e bas ting ries n u o Mo ccess a for

e bas ting ries n u Mo ccesso a for

FTC

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

FTO

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 161 of 292

VETEC Actuator Type AT

(AT = AIR TORQUE, see Chapter 9.5.2)

Attachment Type B

Mo u for nting acc ess base orie s

Mo u for nting acc ess base orie s

FTC

ATO (Air to open)

FTO

Spring closes

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

Attachment Type C ase g b ries n i t un sso Mo acce r fo

ase g b ries n i t un sso Mo acce r fo

FTC

ATO (Air to open)

FTO

ATO (Air to open)

Spring closes

Spring closes

Attachment Type D M fo oun r a tin cc g es ba so se rie s

M fo oun r a tin cc g es ba so se rie s

FTC

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

FTO

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

Figure 9.2.32.1.-1:  Manual gear and the different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type AT

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 162 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.32.1  Principle of operation The Type AT Actuator is a single-acting piston actuator. Thanks to different spring combinations, the required torques for special applications can be implemented easily. Its special design allows the actuator to be used with different opening angles. The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. Note: The process medium can flow through the Rotary plug valve in either direction. The standard direction of flow for: „„ Liquids = Flow To Open (FTO) direction of flow „„ Gases and Vapors = Flow To Close (FTC) direction of flow The shaft/plug arrangement is eccentric (Figure 9.2.32.1.-1). The double-eccentric design of the Rotary plug valve is achieved in combination with the offset of the plug's pivot. When turning the plug shaft from closed position in opening direction, the doubleeccentric design allows the plug to lift off the seat smoothly without initial breakaway torque. The valve is not opened suddenly and shows a stable control response even with small opening angles. The rotary plug valve can be used for both directions of flow. The flow coefficient is determined by the opening angle of the plug. The inherent characteristic of the Rotary plug valves can be converted into a linear or equal percentage characteristic using positioners and cam discs.

Figure 9.2.32.1.-1:  Double-eccentric principle

Fail-safe position The control valve offers two possible fail-safe positions in combination with the VETEC Type AT Diaphragm Actuator in case the supply air fails: „„ Valve CLOSED without supply air, the Rotary plug valve is closed when the supply air fails. „„ Valve OPEN without supply air, the Rotary plug valve is opened when the supply air fails.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Actuator AT Type

SC/SO 60

Page 163 of 292

SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO 100 150 220 300 450

Version

Spring range

Piston

Spring position

Multi-spring, symmetric

Opening angles

75°

SC3

Nm

13.0

22.0

30.0

49.2

63

99

SC3/4

Nm

15.5

25.7

35.5

57.4

74

115

SC4

Nm

17.7

29.3

40.5

65.6

84

132

SC4/5

Nm

19.9

33.0

45.6

73.8

95

148

SC5

Nm

22.1

36.7

50.7

82.0

105

165

SC5/6

Nm

24.3

40.3

55.7

90.2

116

181

SC6

Nm

26.5

44.0

60.8

98.4

126

198

O-ring NBR (standard)

–20 to +80 °C

Temp. range O-ring FPM (high temp.)

–15 to +150 °C

O-ring silicone

–40 to +80 °C

Supply air range

3 to 6 bar

Manual gear

Yes

Note

SC = Spring closes, SO = Spring opens

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.32.1.-2:  Technical data for Actuator AT size SC/SO 60 to 450

Actuator AT Type

SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO SC/SO 600 900 1200 2000 3000 5000

Version

Spring range

Piston

Spring position

Multi-spring, symmetric

Opening angles

75°

SC3

Nm

135

190

255

433

655

1104

SC3/4

Nm

157

221

298

505

764

1288

SC4

Nm

180

253

340

577

873

1472

SC4/5

Nm

202

285

383

649

982

1656

SC5

Nm

224

316

425

721

1091

1839

SC5/6

Nm

247

348

468

793

1200

2023

SC6

Nm

269

379

510

865

1309

2207

O-ring NBR (standard)

–20 to +80 °C

Temp. range O-ring FPM (high temp.)

–15 to +150 °C

O-ring silicone

–40 to +80 °C

Supply air range Manual gear Note

3 to 6 bar Yes SC = Spring closes, SO = Spring opens

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.32.1.-3:  Technical data for Actuator AT size SC/SO 600 to 5000

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 164 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Figure 9.2.32.1.-4:  Sectional drawing of Actuator Type AT - Rack and pinion

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 165 of 292

9.2.33.  New design features AT the so-called rotating wing actuator is a special rotary type model. Instead of a piston there is a sealed wing as a motion element which moves in a housing which takes the shape of a quarter segment and allows a rotary motion of max. 90° degrees. 9.2.33.1  Vetec Type 62.7 AT short pattern with flanges The economical VETEC short pattern valve recovers the well proved idea of the Maxifluss double eccentric beared design into a highly cost efficient and simplified version. Due to the reduced applicability compared with standard types 72.X and 82.X it is decreased in the range of „„ Nominal diameters „„ Service temperature (max. 250° C) „„ Cv100-values „„ Actuator sizes and ∆p „„ Service media Hence the use is for non-critical media only, in the supply system of refineries. e.g. simple water, gas, low temperature steam applications

9.2.33.2  Vetec Type 82.7 R short pattern with flanges The new design features improve handling, function and meet international standards. e.g. NAMUR

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 166 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.34.  VETEC Actuator Type MN (rotary or diaphragm actuator) VETEC Actuator Type MN Actuator Type MN

Sectional drawing of Type MN

Type MN Actuator with mounted positioner and Solenoid Valve Attachment Type B

Attachment Type B

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

ATO (Air to close) Spring opens

Figure 9.2.34.-1:  Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 167 of 292

9.2.34.1  Principle of operation The Type MN Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and a centrally arranged return spring on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the lever for the valve shaft. The short travel ensures very short actuating times. In addition, the actuator is designed for very fine and precise control. Actuator MN Type Version Spring position Opening angles Travel mm Diaphragm area cm2 Spring range bar Spring torque Nm Temperature range Supply air range Manual gear DVGW MN

MN200

MN300

MN300

MN300V

Diaphragm Centrally arranged spring 75° 40 298 0.4 to 1.3 35

52

678 678 678 0.4 to 1.3 0.4 to 1.3 0.6 to 2.2 85 110 130 –20 to 80 °C or –40 to 176 °F 3 to 4 bar Manual gear cannot be mounted

Control valve for control systems subject to the special safety requirements applicable for gas supply. For neutral gases acc. to DVGW working paper G 260/1

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.34.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuator MN size MN200 to MN300

Differential pressure ∆p for Actuator Type MN200, MN300, and MN300V 25 40 50 80 100 For Rotary Plug Valves: DN Model 72.X, 73.X NPS 1 1½ 2 3 4 Actuator Type MN200 MN300 Spring range 0.4 to 1.3 bar Supply Direction of flow ∆p in bar Air and actuator action FTO - ATO 2.0 bar 37.6 77.6 38.3 10.9 5.6 FTC - ATC 2.0 bar 153 248 122 35.4 18.3 FTO - ATC 3.0 bar 322 93.6 48.3 FTC - ATO 4.0 bar 152 78.3 For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

150 200 6 8 MN300V 0.6 to 2.2 bar

3.7

2.0

8.6 21.6

4.7 11.8

Table 9.2.34.1.-2:  Differential pressure ∆p for Actuator Type MN200, MN300, and MN300V

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 168 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.35.  VETEC Actuator Type MD (rotary or diaphragm actuator) VETEC Actuator Type MD Actuator Type MD

Sectional drawing of Type MD

Type MD700 Actuator with mounted positioner and Solenoid Valve

Type MD Actuator with manual gear

Attachment Type B:

Figure 9.2.35.-1:  Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MD

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 169 of 292

9.2.35.1  Principle of operation The Type MD Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and several symmetrically arranged return springs. The combination of several spring assemblies and the design of the piston rod bearing allow high torques to be transmitted. The short travel ensures very short actuating times. The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. A multistage version is possible.

Actuator MD Type Version Spring position Opening angles Travel mm Diaphragm area cm2

MD450 Diaphragm Multi-spring, symmetric 75° to 90° 100 1610

Spring range bar 0.65 to 1.10 1.15 to 2.01 1.56 to 2.72 1.70 to 3.40 1.71 to 3.13 Spring torque Nm 845 1250 1680 1910 Supply air range 3 to 6 bar Temperature range – 40 to +80 °C / – 40 to +176 °F For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

1950

Table 9.2.35.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuator Type MD450

Actuator MD Type

MD700

Version Diaphragm Spring position Multi-spring, symmetric Opening angles 75° to 90° Travel mm 130 2 Diaphragm area cm 3390 Spring range bar 1.51 to 2.80 1.74 to 3.10 2.10 to 3.75 2.51 to 4.07 2.88 to 4.66 Spring torque Nm 4420 5100 6150 7350 8450 Supply air range 3 to 6 bar Temperature range – 40 to +80 °C / – 40 to +176 °F For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.35.1.-2:  Technical data for Actuator Type MD700

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 170 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Figure 9.2.35.1.-3:  Sectional drawing of Actuator Type MD

Application: Very high torques (9,000 Nm), high turn down ratios, severe applications.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 171 of 292

9.2.36.  VETEC Actuator Type MZ (rotary or diaphragm actuator) VETEC Actuator Type MZ Actuator Type MZ

Sectional drawing of Type MZ

Type MZ Actuator with mounted positioner and Solenoid Valve Attachment Type B

Attachment Type B: ATO and Spring closes

Attachment Type B: ATC and Spring opens

Figure 9.2.36.-1:  Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type MZ

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 172 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.36.1  Principle of operation The Type MZ Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and a centrally arranged return spring on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the lever for the valve shaft. The short travel ensures very short actuating times. In addition, the actuator is designed for very fine and precise control. The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. Actuator Type

MZ450

MZ700

Version Diaphragm Spring position Centrally arranged spring Opening angles 75° Travel mm 100 130 2 Diaphragm area cm 1650 3580 Spring range bar 0.45 to 1.30 0.88 to 2.10 0.40 to 1.28 0.69 to 2.05 Spring torque Nm 605 1180 1305 2210 Supply air range 3 to 4 bar Temperature range – 40 to +80 °C or – 40 to +176 °F Manual gear Yes For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.36.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuator MZ450 and MZ700

Differential pressure for Actuator MZ450 DN For Rotary Plug Valves: Type 73.3, 73.7 NPS Spring range Direction of flow Supply Air and actuator action FTO - ATO 2.0 bar FTC - ATC 2.0 bar FTO - ATC 3.0 bar FTC - ATO 4.0 bar Spring range Direction of flow Supply Air and actuator action FTO - ATO 3.0 bar FTC - ATC FTO - ATC 3.0 bar FTC - ATO

100 4

150 6

200 250 8 10 0.4 to 1.2 bar

300 12

400 16

4.7

1.1

9.7 22.3 35.0

2.4 5.8 9.1

∆p in bar 20.5

11.2

7.7

42.7 98.3 154

23.3 16.1 53.6 37.2 84.0 58.2 1.0 to 2.1 bar ∆p in bar

53.8

29.4

20.3

12.2

3.1

48.3

26.3

18.2

11.0

2.8

Table 9.2.36.1.-2:  Differential pressure for Actuator MZ450

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 173 of 292

Differential pressure for Actuator Type MZ700 DN For Rotary Plug Valves: Type 73.3, 73.7 NPS Spring range Direction of flow Supply Air and actuator action FTO - ATO 2.0 bar FTC - ATC 2.0 bar FTO - ATC 3.0 bar FTC - ATO 4.0 bar Spring range Direction of flow Supply Air and actuator action FTO - ATO 3.0 bar FTC - ATC FTO - ATC 3.0 bar FTC - ATO

100 4

150 6

200 250 8 10 0.4 to 1.2 bar

300 12

400 16

13.6

3.4

27.6 62.5 97.5

7.1 16.3 25.5

∆p in bar 48.7

59.8

32.6

100.3 229

121 275

66.1 150

22.6

45.8 104 162 0.68 to 1.95 bar ∆p in bar

126

103

56.1

38.8

23.4

6.0

113

160

87.1

60.3

36.3

9.4

Table 9.2.36.1.-3:  Differential pressure for Actuator MZ700

Anti Surge Valve DN 3" to 16" Class 300 RF, A216 WCC, A351 CF8M, A352 LCC, with positioner and solenoid valve. Control application, air to close (ATC) in 8 second, spring opens in 2 second, silencer integrated, operation temperature -105 °C to +150 °C / -157 °F to 302 °F. Figure 9.2.36.1.-4:  VETEC Anti Surge Valve with Actuator Type MZ700

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 174 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.37.  VETEC Actuator Type S (rotary or diaphragm actuator) VETEC Actuator Type S Actuator Type S

Sectional drawing of Type S

Type S Actuator with mounted positioner Attachment Type A

Type S Actuator with mounted positioner and Handwheel, Attachment Type A

Attachment Type A

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

ATC (Air to close) Spring opens

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic actuator with a linear or rotational movement

Page 175 of 292

VETEC Actuator Type S Attachment Type B

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

ATC (Air to close) Spring opens Attachment Type C

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

ATC (Air to close) Spring opens Attachment Type C

ATO (Air to open) Spring closes

ATC (Air to close) Spring opens

Figure 9.2.37.-1:  Different attachments for the VETEC Actuator Type S

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 176 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.2.37.1  Principle of operation The Type S Actuator is equipped with a diaphragm and one or more centrally arranged return springs on the inside. The freely supported piston rod is directly connected to the lever for the valve shaft. Its design allows the actuator to be used with different opening angles. The actuator can be equipped with additional manual gears as well as end stops. Type Version Spring position Opening angles Travel mm Diaphragm area cm2

S160

S320

Diaphragm Centrally arranged spring 75°

29 54 160 320 Springs 2+3 0.9 to 1.8 Springs Spring range Springs 1+3 1.2 to 2.3 1.6 to 3.4 1+2+3 Springs 1+2+3 1.7 to 3.4 Temperature range –40 to +80 °C or –40 to 176 °F Supply air range 3 to 6 bar Manual gear For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.2.37.1.-1:  Technical data for Actuator Type S

Figure 9.2.37.1.-2:  Actuator Type S with Rotary Plug Valve Type 72.1 with flanges

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators

Page 177 of 292

9.3  Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators External Actuator Type SERVOVALVE Actuator SERVOVALVE Series RCPM

Sectional drawing of Series RCPM

SERVOVALVE Series RCPM Actuator with mounted positioner

Piston Actuator for torques 20.000 to 50.000 Nm

Figure 9.3.-1:  External Actuator Type SERVOVALVE

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 178 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

All the Servovalve series of quarter-turn scotch-yoke actuators are designed and manufactured for the transmission of high torque suited for Ball or Butterfly valves, Plug etc. for on-off or throttling service. In the central housing a slotted link kinematism provides to transform the linear motion of the rod into the rotary motion of the valve shaft. The symmetric series are suitable for the valves in which it is requested an exalted torque during all the stroke. Therefore the canted series are available for valves in which output torque is requested in the final released spring position (fail to close) or break compressed spring position (fail to open). Actuator Type

SERVOVALVE

Version Single acting scotch-yoke actuator Spring position Centrally arranged spring Opening angles 90° ± 5° 2 Diaphragm area cm 254 to 865 Spring torque Nm 810 to 12610 Supply air range 3 to 6 bar Temperature range – 20 to +80 °C or – 40 to +176 °F Manual gear Yes For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet.

Figure 9.3.-2:  The central housing is designed to accept different types of scotch-yoke mechanisms symmetrical, clockwise or counter-clockwise canted. (Photo: SERVOVALVE)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators

Page 179 of 292

9.3.1.  Symmetrical scotch-yoke RJPM and RSPM series are available for the on-off or throttling valves in which it is requested an exalted torque during all the valve shaft running. SYMMETRIC SCOTCH YOKE (SPRING CLOSE)

UNITARY TORQUE

2

1,5

1

0,5

0 Closed

15°

30°

Spring

45°

60°

Fluid single acting

75°

Open

Fluid double acting

Figure 9.3.1.-1:  Typical output torque diagram with symmetrical scotch-yoke

9.3.2.  Canted scotch-yoke RWPM and RCPM series are ideally suited for the valves where it is requested an exalted torque in a specific final position (generally closed position or failure position) compared to the run and the opposite initial position.

UNITARY TORQUE

2

CANTED SCOTCH YOKE (SPRING CLOSE)

1,5

1

0,5

0 Closed

15°

30°

45°

60°

75°

Open

Spring Fluid single acting Fluid double acting Figure 9.3.2.-1:  Typical output torque diagram with canted scotch-yoke

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 180 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.3.3.  Scotch Yoke

Figure 9.3.3.-1:  Rotork Scotch Yoke actuator1

Displacment

1.5

Scotch Yoke Crank and Slider

1.0 0.5 0 - 0.5 -1.0 -1.5

0°

90 °

180 °

270 °

360 °

270 °

360 °

Degrees Acceleration 0.0004 0.0003 0.0002 0.0001 0 - 0.0001 - 0.0002 - 0.0003 - 0.0004 - 0.0005

Scotch Yoke Crank and Slider 0°

90 °

180 ° Degrees

Figure 9.3.3.-2:  Comparison of displacement and acceleration for a Scotch Yoke compared with a crank and slider Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Diagram: Rotork) 1 http://www.rotork.com

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators

Page 181 of 292

The Scotch yoke is a mechanism for converting the linear motion of a slider into rotational motion or vice-versa. The piston or other reciprocating part is directly coupled to a sliding yoke with a slot that engages a pin on the rotating part. The shape of the motion of the piston is a pure sine wave over time given a constant rotational speed. 9.3.4.  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators

Figure 9.3.4.-1:  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)

Operating pressure Torque Output Temperature Ranges

Pneumatic up to 12 bar (175 psi) Hydraulic up to 210 bar (3,000 psi) 500 to 600,000 Nm (5.3 million lbf/in -30 °C to 100 °C -22 °F to 212 °C -20 °C to 160 °C -4 °F to 320 °C -40 °C to 160 °C -40 °F to 320 °C -60 °C to 160 °C -76 °F to 320 °C Table 9.3.4.-2:  Technical data

Advantages: The advantages compared to a standard crankshaft and connecting rod setup are: „„ Strong compact actuators for large valves and high torques „„ For On-Off and modulating „„ Double acting or single acting with spring return „„ Prepared for quick operation (extremely fast emergency) „„ Optional: Manual override „„ Fewer moving parts. „„ Smoother operation.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 182 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

„„ Higher percentage of the time spent at top dead center (dwell) improving theoretical engine efficiency of constant volume combustion cycles, though actual gains have not been demonstrated. „„ In an engine application, elimination of joint typically served by a wrist pin, and near elimination of piston skirt and cylinder scuffing, as side loading of piston due to sine of connecting rod angle is eliminated. The disadvantages are: „„ Rapid wear of the slot in the yoke caused by sliding friction and high contact pressures. „„ Increased heat loss during combustion due to extended dwell at top dead center offsets any constant volume combustion improvements in real engines. „„ Lesser percentage of the time spent at bottom dead center reducing blowdown time for two stroke engines, when compared with a conventional piston and crankshaft mechanism. „„ Generally inadequate thrust (torque) at spring-return action. „„ Inevitable leakage after long working hours. „„ Higher friction and hysteresis compared to diaphragm actuators. „„ Expensive for high thrusts (torques) and normal pressures. 9.3.5.  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators

Figure 9.3.5.-1:  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Pneumatic single acting quarter turn scotch-yoke actuators

Page 183 of 292

9.3.5.1  Applications Scotch yoke actuators are designed to operate ball, butterfly and plug valves requiring a rotary, quartrer-turn movement for either on/off or modulating duty. This setup is most commonly used in control valve actuators in high pressure oil and gas pipelines. Approvals and Industry Standards Scotch Yoke principle gives high torque in the end positions „„ Temperature range -20 °C to +80 °C „„ High efficiency, low air consumption Disadvantages: „„ Generally inadequate thrust (torque) at spring-return action. „„ Inevitable leakage after long working hours. „„ Higher friction and hysteresis compared to diaphragm actuators. „„ Expensive for high thrusts (torques) and normal pressures.

Figure 9.3.5.1.-1:  Quarter-Turn Pneumatic Actuators (Photo: Rotork)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 184 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4  Electric with a linear or rotational movement 9.4.1.  Electro-mechanical Actuators The use of electro-mechanical actuators for control valves is widespread. One finds them mainly in heating and air conditioning systems, power stations and waterworks and everywhere else where a pneumatic pressure system is either too expensive and/or too complicated. This applies above all, to plants and applications where no protection against explosion is required. Electro-mechanical actuators are available in a broad palette of different sizes and gearing structures. Actuator thrusts and/or torques extend from a few kN (kNm) to many tons of thrust and extremely high torque moments (MNm). A simple electric motor which is generally operated by alternating current or even threephase alternating current serves as the actual drive. A step-down gear provides an appropriate valve control rate (stroking speed) and corresponding actuator thrust. Motor circuit breakers and thrust dependent switches prevent an undesirable overheating and/ or actuator thrusts which are too high. Position switches may limit the valve stroke to a maximum travel. Thrust or torque switches enable electrical disconnection if the adjustable thrust or torque is exceeded. These actuators are often provided with a hand wheel or a cranked control handle in order to allow manual operation to drive the control valve to the desired position in the case of an electric power failure. Furthermore, a great number of options usually exist with respect to the actuator movement, the required thrust or torque, nominal voltages, direct or alternating current and so forth. Typical electro-mechanical actuators for operating control valves are represented in Figure 9.4.1.-1.

Figure 9.4.1.-1:  Linear actuator Type SAM

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 185 of 292

Naturally, the different actuator types have design-related strengths and weaknesses which are briefly described below: Advantages: „„ No additional auxiliary energy (e.g. compressed air) required. „„ Very high actuator thrusts (torque moments) possible. „„ Robust and reliable in the case of standard conditions (e.g. climate). „„ Precise positioning in connection with positioners. „„ Self-locking gear assures a high travel rigidity (stiffness). „„ Simple overload protector applicable. Disadvantages: „„ Expensive compared to pneumatic diaphragm actuators. „„ Low control rate (stroking speed) in case of higher actuator thrusts. „„ Explosion-proof attainable only at high costs (expensive). „„ Sensitive to moisture and corrosion. „„ No automatic failure position in the case of auxiliary energy loss. „„ No real suitability for extremely high and low environmental temperatures. „„ Proportional characteristics only in connection with positioner possible.

Figure 9.4.1.-2:  Type SAM electric actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 186 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.2.  Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuator Type 5857 300 N Type 5825 500 N

Type 5824 700 N

Type 3374 2500 N

Type 3274 4500 N

Type 3375 7500 N to 12500 N

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 187 of 292

Series 5857, 5824, and 5825 Electric actuator for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. Actuator Type

5857 Three-point stepping

5857 with Digital positioner

Fail-safe function

5824 Three-point stepping

5825 Three-point stepping

Without

With

24 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz

24 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 24 V (±10 %), 50 Hz

24 V AC (±10 %), (50 and 60 Hz) 24 V DC (±10 %)

Power consumption

Approx. 3 VA

Approx. 5 VA

Degree of protection

IP 42

IP 42

IP 54

IP 54

II

II

II

II

Nominal thrust

300 N

300 N

700 N

280/500 N

Rated travel

6 mm

6 mm

6/12/15 mm

6/12/15 mm

Transit time for rated travel

20 s

30/20/10 s

18/35/36/70/90 s

18/35/36/70/90 s

Handwheel

Yes

Yes

Yes

Optional

Power supply

Protection class

Stem extends

Yes

Stem retracts

Yes

Connection to valve

Digital positioner Permissible temperatures Options Materials

Approx. 3 to 6 VA Approx. 4 to 8 VA

Force-locking

Force-locking

Force-locking

Force-locking

Form-fit

Form-fit

Noise immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

Noise emission

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

Input signal

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

Out put signal

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

Ambient

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

At connecting stem

0 to 120 °C

0 to 120 °C

0 to 130 °C

0 to 130 °C

2 limit switches

Max. 230 V, 3 A

Max. 230 V, 3 A

1 potentiometer

0 to 1000 Ω

0 to 1000 Ω

Housing

Plastic

Plastic

Plastic

Plastic

Coupling nut

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.2.-1:  Electro-mechanical actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 188 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.2.1  Electric Actuator Type 5857 Application Electric actuator for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems. For force-locking Types 3222, 3222 N, 3226, 3267 and 2488 Valves (DN 15 to 25) as well as special versions of Type 3260 and Type 3226 Valves. The Type 5857 Actuator is a linear actuator which is controlled by either a continuousaction signal or a three-point stepping signal. Special features „„ 6 mm travel „„ Supply voltage ◊  Three-point stepping version: 230 V, 50 Hz or 24 V, 50 Hz ◊  Version with digital positioner: 24 V AC (50 and 60 Hz) or 24 V DC „„ Three-point stepping version equipped with synchronous motor and maintenancefree gear or version with digital positioner equipped with stepper motor „„ Motor switched off by torque switches „„ Handwheel for manual override

Figure 9.4.2.1.-1:  Type 5857 Electric Actuator (three-point stepping version)

„„ Travel indicator Digital positioners „„ Automatic initialization after applying operating voltage „„ Reversed direction of action by activating a slide switch „„ Current travel calculated over the transit time „„ Operational status and errors indicated by LEDs „„ Adjustable actuating times (10 to 30 s) „„ Blockage detection

Figure 9.4.2.1.-2:  Memory pen 64

„„ Adjustable range of input voltage and output voltage „„ Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function, and direct connection for monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software: ◊  Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection with PC) ◊  Data transmission over a memory pen

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 189 of 292

Figure 9.4.2.1.-3:  Actuator Type 5857 with a digital positioner

9.4.2.2  Accessories for version with digital positioner „„ TROVIS-VIEW configuration software (6661-1061) for Type 5857 Electric Actuator „„ Hardware package with a Memory Pen – 64, a connecting cable and a modular adapter, order No. 1400-9998 „„ Memory pen – 64, order No. 1400-9753

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 190 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.2.3  Additional electrical equipment The actuator is also available with a digital positioner. Positioners guarantee a predetermined assignment of valve position and control signal. A 0 to 10 V DC signal can be picked up at the brown (BN) and green (GN) wires for position feedback. The version with positioner allows the characteristic to be reversed and is suitable for split-range operation.

2

8

1

1.1

3 4 7 6

5

1

Actuator

7

Valve spring

1.1

Cable

8

2

Handwheel

3

Actuator stem

4

Coupling nut

5

Travel indicator

Cover, serial interface connection, slide switch and LEDs (only for version with digital positioner)

6

Plug stem Figure 9.4.2.3.-1:  Principle of operation

Mounting position The actuator can be mounted in any position, except suspended downwards. Electrical connection Connecting cable with wire-end ferrules

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 191 of 292

Technical Data of Electric Actuator Type 5857 Electric actuator for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems. For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to 50. Type 5857 Actuator Version Three-point stepping version Connection to valve Rated travel Transit time for rated travel Nominal thrust Power supply Power consumption Manual override

Force-locking 6 mm 20 s 300 N 230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 24 V (±10 %), 50 Hz Approx. 3 VA Yes

Permissible temperatures Ambient Storage At the connecting stem Degree of protection Protection class Noise immunity Noise emission Digital positioner Input signal Position feedback Characteristic

1)

With digital positioner Force-locking 6 mm 30/20 2)/10 s 300 N 24 V AC (±10 %), (50 and 60 Hz) 24 V DC (±10 %) 3) 5 VA Yes

0 to +50 °C –20 to +70 °C 0 to +120 °C IP 42 II EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3

IP 42 II EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3

–

0 to 10 V 1) 0 to 10 V 1) Linear 1)

Table 9.4.2.3.-2:  Technical data

Value can be changed in TROVIS-VIEW, refer to table on Settings of the digital positioner 2) Default setting 3) 10 s applies to 24 V DC (–0 %, +10 %) for Transit time for rated travel setting

Figure 9.4.2.3.-3:  Controllers with Electric Actuators Type 5857 with Globe Valve Type 3222

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 192 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.2.4  Electrical connection

Three-point stepping version

Actuator

L Ce

Ce

eL aL

eL aL

Three-point stepping signal

N

Note! Decoupling capacitors Ce in the output circuit of the connected controller may not exceed a value of 2.5 nF in order to guarante the proper functioning f the actuator. Actuator stem retracts Actuator stem extends

aL eL WH white BN brown GN green

WH BN GN

Version with digital positioner with 24 V DC Control Feedback, signal output 24 V, DC 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V + _ + _ _ + OG YE RD BK BN GN

BN BK YE

brown black yellow

GN green RD red OG orange

M Figure 9.4.2.4.-1:  Wiring diagram of Type 5857

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

9.4.3.  Controller with Electric Actuator Type 5757 For domestic hot water heating

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 193 of 292

Page 194 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.3.1  Application Electric actuator with integrated digital controller used to position force-locking valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 25. Domestic hot water heating control in instantaneous heating systems used in small to medium-sized buildings connected to a district heating or local heat supply network. The Type 5757 is a combination of a linear actuator and an integrated digital controller. It is especially designed for DHW (Domestic Hot Water) heating in instantaneous heating systems for small to medium-sized buildings. It is particularly suitable for mounting to SAMSON Types 3222, 3222 N, 2488 and 3267 Valves as well as to special versions of Type 3226 and Type 3260 Valves. Special features „„ Control using two different set points, e.g. DHW temperature and DHW temperature for thermal disinfection. A binary input is used to switch between the set points. „„ Function to maintain water temperature constant, preventing the heat exchanger from cooling down between tapping „„ Direction of action reversible ◊  Globe valve opens when the actuator stem retracts (increasing / increasing) ◊  Three-way mixing valve mixes/diverts the flow(s) when the actuator stem extends (increasing/decreasing) „„ Limit value monitoring ◊  The valve is closed by the actuator when the maximum adjustable limit value is exceeded ◊  The frost protection function is started when the temperature falls below the minimum adjustable limit „„ Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function and direct connection for monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software ◊  Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection to PC) ◊  Data transmission over a memory pen „„ Special valve version available for small tapping amounts Accessories ◊  TROVIS-VIEW configuration software (6661-1062) for Type 5757 Controller with Electric Actuator ◊  Hardware package with a memory pen – 64, a connecting cable and a modular adapter ◊  Memory pen – 64 ◊  Type 5207-0060 Pt 1000 Sensor ◊  Sensor pocket, order no. 1990-9249 ◊  Flow rate sensor with extension cable with mating connector ◊  Flow switch

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

2 1

3 VL

Page 195 of 292

District heating return flow

District heating supply

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

6 RL

3

Hot water

2 1 4

5 6

7

Circulation circuit

4+7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5

Cold water

Heat exchanger Type 5207-0060 Temperature Sensor incl. sensor pocket Supply from district heating network Type 5757 Controller with Electric Actuator Flow rate sensor with cable Return flow to district heating network Valve, e.g. Type 3222

Figure 9.4.3.1.-1:  Typical application: Type 5757 with Type 5207-0060 Pt 1000 Sensor incl. sensor pocket and flow rate sensor

2

3

District heating supply

4

3 5

7

Heat exchanger Type 5207-0060 Temperature Sensor incl. sensor pocket Supply from district heating network (VL) Type 5724/5725 Controller with Electric Actuator Flow rate sensor with extension cable Return flow from district heating network (RL) Valve, e.g. Type 3222 Safety temperature monitor, e.g. Type 5313 (only in combination with Type 5725)

District heating return flow

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Hot water

8

6

2

1 Circulation circuit

4+7 6

5

Cold water

Figure 9.4.3.1.-2:  DHW heating in instantaneous heating system, typical application with Type 5724/5725

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 196 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.4.  Electric Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725 Application Electric actuator with integrated digital controller for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to 50. The Type 5724 and Type 5725 are a combination of a linear actuator and an integrated digital controller. They are especially designed for DHW (DHW = Domestic Hot Water) heating in instantaneous heating systems for small to medium-sized buildings and for fixed set point control circuits in mechanical engineering applications. They are particularly suitable for mounting to SAMSON Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 and 3226 Valves. The Type 5724 Actuator is without fail-safe action and Type 5725 with fail-safe action. The Type 5724 has a manual override to manually move the valve in de-energized state. Special features „„ Control using two different set points, e.g. DHW temperature and DHW temperature for thermal disinfection „„ Manual setting possible at the set point potentiometer or over TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface „„ Function to maintain water temperature constant, preventing the heat exchanger from Type 5725-7 cooling down since the last hot water was tapped „„ Pump output to control a circulating pump or a circulation circuit can alternatively be used as a fault alarm output „„ Direction of action reversible: ◊  Globe valve opens when the actuator stem retracts (increasing / increasing) ◊  Three-way mixing valve mixes/diverts the flow(s) when the actuator stem extends (increasing/decreasing) „„ Limit value monitoring: ◊  The valve is closed by the actuator when the maximum adjustable limit value is exceeded. ◊  The frost protection function is started when the temperature falls below the minimum adjustable limit. „„ Configuration, parameterization, diagnostic function, and direct connection for monitoring over TROVIS-VIEW software: ◊  Direct data transmission over a connecting cable (direct connection to PC) ◊  Data transmission over a memory pen

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 197 of 292

9.4.4.1  Type 5724 The controller with electric actuator without fail-safe action has a handwheel (2) used to manually position the valve (only when the actuator is disconnected from the power supply). Travel and direction of action can be read off the travel indicator (9) on the side of the actuator housing. 9.4.4.2  Type 5725 The controller with electric actuator with fail-safe action is basically the same as Type 5724. However, it contains a spring assembly (8) and an electromagnet which in deenergized state move the connected valve to the appropriate fail-safe position. The Type 5725 Actuator is only available with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends”. A handwheel (2) is not fitted. On disconnecting the actuator from the power supply and removing the housing lid (1.1), you can use a key to adjust the actuator manually. As soon as the key is released, the actuator immediately resumes its initial position. 8

9 1

12 2

1.1

1.2

15 6

12 15

12 0 15 12 6

0

0

0

50

0

10

6

3

11

1

4

A

AB

B

Controller with electric actuator 1.1 Housing lid 1.2 Cable entry 2 Handwheel (Type 5724 only) 3 Actuator stem 4 Coupling nut 8 Spring assembly (Type 5725 only) 9 Scale for travel indication 10 Plug stem 11 Set point potentiometer 12 Serial interface (RJ-12 jack)

Figure 9.4.4.2.-1:  Functional diagram of Type 5724 and Type 5725

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 198 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Technical data of Electric Actuator Type 5824 and Type 5825 with integrated digital controller for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. For globe and three-way valves, e.g. Types 3213, 3214, 3260, 3222 or 3226 Valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to 50. 5824 5825 Actuator Type

-10

-13

Fail-safe action

-23

-30

-33

-10

-13

-20

Without

Connection to valve Rated travel in mm

-20

6

12

-30

-33

With

Force-locking 6

-23

Form-fit 12

15

15

Force-locking 6

6

12

Form-fit 12

15

15

Transit time for rated travel 35 s 18 s 70 s 35 s 90 s 45 s 35 s 18 s 70 s 35 s 90 s 45 s Transit time in case of fail-safe action

–

Fail-safe action

–

Nominal thrust

700 N

Power supply

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz

4s

6s

7s

Stem extends 500 N

280 N

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz

Power consumption, approx. 3 VA 7 VA 3 VA 7 VA 3 VA 7 VA 5 VA 9 VA 5 VA 9 VA 5 VA 9 VA Manual override Perm. ambient temperature

Yes

Possible 1)

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

–20 to 70 °C

–20 to 70 °C

0 to 130 °C

0 to 130 °C

Perm. storage temperature Perm. temperature at connecting stem Degree of protection (upright position) Noise immunity

IP 54

IP 54

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

Noise emission

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

Binary input BE1 3)

Floating contact to switch between internal set points or to deactivate the function to keep DHW at a constant temperature

Binary input BE2 3)

Flow switch

Binary output

230 V / 50 Hz, max. 1 A

Additional electrical equipment Temperature sensor Flow rate sensor Flow switch

Pt 1000 530 pulses/l Yes 2) · Alternative to flow rate sensor

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.4.2.-2:  Technical data of Actuator Type 5724 and Type 5725 1)

Manual override using a 4 mm Allen key (after removing the housing lid), always returns to fail-safe position after safety release.

2)

The flow switch or flow rate sensor is not required in DHW heating in instantaneous systems with a constant circulation. (DHW = Domestic Hot Water)

3)

Recommendation: Use devices with gold contacts when using relays.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 199 of 292

9.4.4.3  Examples of electrical actuator Type 5824/5825 with various control valves Type 5825 with three way Valve Type 3260

Type 5825 with Flow regulator Type 2488

Type 5825 with Valve Type 3222

Type 5825 with Valve Type 3213

Type 5824 with Valve Type 3214

Type 5824 with three way Valve Type 3226

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 200 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.5.  Electro-hydraulic actuator Electro hydraulic actuators include, in most cases, a closed hydraulic system existing of an electrical drive motor, a pump and a hydraulic cylinder with plunger and actuator stem. Position control is often integrated i.e. a force balancing element with an electric input signal of usually 4 to 20 mA and a corresponding feedback via a range spring. A flapper-nozzle system regulates, via a special hydraulic high pressure valve, the pressures within the double acting hydraulic cylinder until the desired position of the valve stem is reached. A proportional relationship results in this way between input signal and valve travel (stroke of the control valve). Similar to an electro-mechanical actuator, the direction of movement and force can be reversed. If a plant has numerous electro hydraulic actuators, a central hydraulic unit is often used. In such a case all actuators are supplied centrally with a constant hydraulic pressure. Therefore, the individual actuators no longer contain the pump, but only the piston actuator and the positioner which regulates Figure 9.4.5.-1:  Electro-hydraulic actuator the pressure on both sides of the piston Type 3274 with high accuracy until the required travel position is reached. Figure 9.4.5.-1 shows the details of an electro-hydraulic actuator. Advantages: „„ Very high actuator thrusts attainable. „„ Relatively high control rate (stroking speed) possible. „„ High rigidity (travel stiffness) dampens oscillations of valve stem. „„ Automatic failure position in case of auxiliary energy loss. Disadvantages: „„ Very heavy, extensive construction, expensive. „„ In most cases not every mounting position suitable. „„ Protection against explosion attainable only with high cost. „„ Unsuitable for extremely high and low temperatures. „„ Sensitive to rough service conditions, frequently maintenance required.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Figure 9.4.5.-2:  Electro-hydraulic actuator Type 3274

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 201 of 292

Page 202 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Electric Actuator Type 3274, Type 3374 and Type 3375 For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting on SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280. Actuator Type

3274-1

3274-2

3374

3375

Three-point stepping

Three-point stepping

Three-point stepping

Three-point stepping

Without

With

Without

Without

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 24 V (±10 %), 50 Hz

24 V AC (±10 %), (50 and 60 Hz) 24 V DC (±10 %)

24 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz

24 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption

Approx. 3 VA

Approx. 5 VA

Degree of protection

IP 42

IP 42

IP 54

IP 54

II

II

II

II

4500 N

4500 N

2500 N

7500/12500 N

6 mm

6 mm

6/12/15 mm

6/12/15 mm

Transit time for rated travel

20 s

30/20/10 s

18/35/36/70/90 s

18/35/36/70/90 s

Handwheel

Yes

Yes

Yes

Optional

Fail-safe function Power supply

Protection class Nominal thrust Rated travel

Stem extends

Yes

Stem retracts

Yes

Connection to valve

Digital positioner Permissible temperatures Options Materials

Approx. 3 to 6 VA Approx. 4 to 8 VA

Force-locking

Force-locking

Force-locking

Force-locking

Form-fit

Form-fit

Noise immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

Noise emission

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

Input signal

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

Out put signal

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

Ambient

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

0 to 50 °C

At connecting stem

0 to 120 °C

0 to 120 °C

0 to 130 °C

0 to 130 °C

2 limit switches

Max. 230 V, 3 A

Max. 230 V, 3 A

1 potentiometer

0 to 1000 Ω

0 to 1000 Ω

Housing

Plastic

Plastic

Plastic

Plastic

Coupling nut

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.5.-3:  Electro-mechanical and electro-hydraulic actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 203 of 292

9.4.6.  Electrohydraulic Actuators Types 3274-11 to -23 Application Actuators for positioning control valves. The electrohydraulic actuators receive threepoint stepping or continuous output signal from electric controllers. Nominal thrust up to 7300 N · Rated travels 15 and 30 mm. The actuators are available with different thrusts. Special features „„ Compact design including electric or optionally mechanical override. „„ Safe functioning due to force-dependent disconnection of the motor when final positions are reached or when overload occurs. „„ Installation of positioner, potentiometers and electric or inductive limit switches in the terminal box. „„ Optionally fail-safe action for version with electric override. Versions with electric override (Figure 9.4.6.-1) Electric override activated by two pushbuttons on the terminal box Type 3274-11 · Electrohydraulic actuator with nominal thrust F retracts of 2100 N in operating direction stem retracts, and nominal thrust F extends of 1800 N in operating direction stem extends. Type 3274-12 · F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 3000 N Type 3274-13 · F retracts and F extends both 4300 N Type 3274-14 · F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 7300 N Versions with mechanical override (Figure 9.4.6.-2) Mechanical override adjusted using an Allen key (width across flats/SW 24) at the additional gearing housing Type 3274-15 · F retracts of 2100 N and F extends of 1800 N Type 3274-16 · F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 3000 N Type 3274-17 · Fretracts and F extends both 4300 N Type 3274-18 · F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 7300 N

Figure 9.4.6.-1:  Electrohydraulic Actuator Type 3274-11 to -14

Versions with fail-safe action and electric override, operating direction of the spring return mechanism according to Figure 9.4.6.-1. Type 3274-21 · F retracts of 2100 N and F extends of 1800 N operating direction of failsafe position: stem extends

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 204 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Type 3274-22 · F retracts of 1800 N and F extends of 2100 N operating direction of failsafe position: stem retracts. Type 3274-23 · F retracts of 500 N and F extends of 3000 N operating direction of failsafe position: stem extends Typetested versions Type 3274-21 and Type 3274-23 Actuators (with failsafe action: stem extends) have been typetested together with various SAMSON valves by German TÜV according to DIN 32730. Register number available on request. Other certifications „„ CSA for version 110 V/60 Hz „„ NEMA 3 Versions with fail-safe action have a spring return mechanism and an additional safety solenoid valve which opens when the power supply is interrupted, reducing the pressure on the cylinder chamber. In this case, electric override is not possible. Override The actuators are fitted with an electric or optionally a mechanical override. Versions with fail-safe action are supplied with electric override only. Electric override Figure 9.4.6.-2:  Type 3274-15 to -18 There are two pushbuttons on the terminal box. Any Electrohydraulic Actuator with travel position can be reached independent of the mechanical override control signal. After the pushbutton is released, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. The control signal can be interrupted by opening the isolator terminal (81 in Figure 9.4.6.-6 to Figure 9.4.6.-8). Mechanical override The release button on the top of the actuator housing must be activated. An Allen key (SW 24) can be used for adjustment. As soon as the release button is deactivated, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. Additional electrical equipment All the electrical equipment can be accessed in the terminal box. Table 9.4.6.-5 shows the maximum amount of equipment. The housing cover is secured by special screws and must not be opened!

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 205 of 292

Electric positioner The positioner compares the controller signal to the signal issued by a potentiometer. The potentiometer signal is proportional to the travel. The output variable produced by the positioner is a three-point stepping control signal. Zero and span for normal and split-range operation are adjustable within a broad range. The operating direction (increasing / increasing or increasing/ decreasing) can be selected. By an external make contact, the final position "retracted" or "extended" can be reached. This does not affect the safety function. The positioner has an additional output for valve position feedback. Electric position transmitter Output signal 0(2) to 10 V or 0(4) to 20 mA with potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω for versions with three-point stepping signal. Potentiometer Actuators can be equipped with one or two potentiometers. Versions with positioner require a potentiometer for valve position feedback to the positioner. Electric limit switch Actuators are equipped with maximum three overridable electric or inductive limit switches on request. The limit switches are activated over infinitely adjustable cam disks. Heating resistor Heating the hydraulic oil increases the lower temperature range. The heating resistor is not protected by the internal fuse. We recommend that an external fuse be used in accordance with the power consumption data indicated on the nameplate. Please also note the instructions for mounting positions in the Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8340 EN.

Figure 9.4.6.-3:  Actuator Type 3274 with three way Valve Type 3260

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 206 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Technical data of Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23 Actuator Type 3274 Version with override Fail-safe action Operating direction Rated travel mm Rated actuating time

-11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 Electric

Mechanical Without

-21

-22

-23

Electric With Stem Stem Stem extends retracts extends

15 or 30 mm 60 s with 15 mm · 120 s with 30 mm (depending on temperature and required thrust Half actuating time on request) Actuating time in case of fail-safe action [mm/s]

Thrust N

Thrust N

Normal Optional

1 3.3

1 3.3

Stem retracts 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500

2100

1800

500

Stem extends 2000 3400 4300 7700 2000 3400 4300 7700

2000

2300

3400

With

With

-

1.3 5

15 mm travel

30 mm travel

Stem retracts 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500 2100 1800 500 Stem extends 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 2100 3000 Power supply 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (both ±10 %) Power consumption 90 to 200 VA (maximum in version with half the actuating time and heating) Perm. ambient –10 to +60 °C Wider range (with heating resistor): –35 to +60 °C temperature Storage temperature –25 to +70 °C Degree of protection IP 65 Control operation Duty cycling S4 according to VDE 0530/IEC 34 with 50% on-time Electronics section of Radio interference level according to DIN VDE 0875 motor Central attachment M30 x 1.5 · Special version for Type 3214 Valve, Mounting DN 150 to 250

Digital positioner

Additional electrical equipment Power supply Control signal Zero shift Change of span Output (feedback) Potentiometers

230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (both ±10 %) 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (Ri = 50 Ω) · 0 to 10 V, 2 to 10 V (Ri = 10 kΩ) 0 to 100 % 30 to 100 % 0(4) to 20 mA, R ≤ 200 Ω · 0(2) to 10 V, R ≤ 2 kΩ 0 to 1000 Ω, 0 to 200 Ω, 0 to 100 Ω, 0 to 275 Ω, 0 to 138 Ω (when rated travel is 80 % of final value), permissible load 0.5 W Maximum three separately adjustable limit switches (see Table 9.4.6.-5) 250 V AC, 5 A Proximity switch SJ 2-N Values according to downstream transistor relay (not included in delivery)

Electric limit switches Perm. load Inductive limit switches Control circuit Heating resistor, With thermostat, activated at approx. –10 °C, deactivated at approx. 0 °C approx. 45 W For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.6.-4:  Technical data of Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 207 of 292

Additional electrical equipment ☑ ˗ 1000 Ω1) ☑ ˗ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗

Electric positioner Electric positioner Potentiometer 1 Potentiometer 2 Electric limit switch 1 Electric limit switch 2 Electric limit switch 3 Inductive limit switch 1 Inductive limit switch 2

Table 9.4.6.-5:  Additional electrical equipment Required for position feedback to the positioner/position transmitter F e F a ϑ

N

2

Type 3274-11...-18,-21,-23

Heating resistor

M

Type 3274-13,-14,-17,-18,-22

1)

Max. equipment combination (arranged by columns) ☑ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ☑ ˗ ☑ ˗ ˗ 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ☑ ˗ ☑ ˗ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗ ˗ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗ ☑ ˗ ☑ ˗

"e" e

L aL eL a43 e53

81

4

Stem extends 1

Stem retracts

"a"

a

a

e

1.311.32 1.33 2.312.322.33

Controller

PE

N

L

Safety interlock circuit, with Type 3274-x only

F a

ϑ

N

L

2 In retracts

Priority position

F e

Type 3274-11... -18, -21,-23

M

Type 3274-13, -14, -17, -18,-22

Heating resistor

Figure 9.4.6.-6:  Circuit diagram for actuators with three-point stepping signal

aL eL a43 e53 82

green brown

"e"

83

81

white

Safety interlock circuit, only with Type 3274-2x PE

N

1

11

a

"a"

13

32

31

4

1

Out extends

e

33 2.31 2.32 2.33

- + - + (0)4 to 20 mA(0)4 to 20 mA Bridge essential + + with 0(2) to 10 V (0)2 to 10V (0)2 to 10V Input Control signal

Output

L

Figure 9.4.6.-7:  Circuit diagram for actuators with positioners

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ☑ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗

˗ ˗ ˗ ˗ ☑ ˗ ˗ ☑ ☑

Heating resistor

Page 208 of 292

M

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

F e

2

ϑ

N

4

1

F a

retracts "e"

L

aL eL a43e53 82 83 81

extends "a"

a

e

12 11 13 32 31 33 2.312.322.33 - + (0)4 to 20 mA + (0)2 to 10 V

PE

N

L

Bridge essential with 0(2) to 10 V

Output Controller Safety interlock circuit, with Type 3274-x only

Figure 9.4.6.-8:  Circuit diagram for actuators with positioners

Figure 9.4.6.-9:  Globe Valve Type 3241 with electrohydraulic Actuator Type 3274-11

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 209 of 292

9.4.7.  Electric Actuator Type 3374 Application Electric actuator designed for use in industrial plants and in heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. The Type 3374 Electric Actuators are linear actuators available with or without fail-safe action. They can be combined with valves from various SAMSON series. Special features: „„ 15 or 30 mm travel „„ Voltage supply 230 V or 24 V with 50 Hz or 60 Hz or 120 V/60 Hz „„ Synchronous motor with planetary gear „„ Motor switched off by torque-dependent switches „„ Mechanical override Standard version Type 3374 · Actuator optionally available with either integrated yoke or central attachment using a M30 x 1.5 ring nut including necessary coupling parts. Typetested version Actuator with fail-safe action "actuator stem extends" for various SAMSON valves. Register number available on request. Further versions with „„ Two adjustable two-way limit switches „„ Two potentiometers Digital positioner „„ Automatic travel calibration „„ Different operating modes can be selected using selector switch

Figure 9.4.7.-1:  Type 3374 Electric Actuator with integrated yoke attached to V2001 Globe Valve

Setting by means of TROVIS-VIEW „„ Additional functions can be set and transferred using a PC or a memory pen „„ Characteristic either linear, equal percentage or freely determinable by entering the desired points „„ Priority position „„ Action selectable when input signal fails No further potentiometers are available for version with digital positioner.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 210 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Attachment to various valves

A

With integrated yoke for „„ V2001 Series, „„ Type 3260 (DN 65 to DN 150) „„ Type 3214 (DN 65 to DN 250)

B

C

With central attachment for „„ Series 3240

With central attachment for „„ Type 3214 (DN 125 to DN 250) „„ Series 3240 (Type 3241 and Type 3244)

Figure 9.4.7.-2:  Attachment to various valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 211 of 292

9.4.7.1  Principle of operation The electric actuators consist of a reversible synchronous motor and a maintenance-free planetary gear with ball screw. The motor is switched off by torque-dependent switches when the end positions are reached or in case of overload. The Type 3374 Actuators with integrated yoke ("A" Figure 9.4.7.-2) are primarily combined with the following valves: „„ V2001 Series „„ Type 3260 in DN 65 to DN 150 „„ Type 3214 in DN 65 to DN 100 „„ Type 3214 balanced by a diaphragm, DN 125 to 250 The Type 3374 Actuators with central attachment are primarily combined with valves with yokes of their own: „„ Series 3240 ("B" Figure 9.4.7.-2) „„ Type 3214 balanced by a bellows, DN 125 to 250 ("C" Figure 9.4.7.-2) 9.4.7.2  Fail-safe action The Type 3374 Actuators are optionally available with fail-safe action: „„ Actuator stem extends Upon power supply failure, the actuator stem extends „„ Actuator stem retracts Upon power supply failure, the actuator stem retracts Technical data Type

3374

Fail-safe action Operating direction

-10

-11

-15

-21

-26

Without ˗

☑ ˗ ˗ Valve attachment Ring nut over Yoke ☑ ☑ ˗ Rated travel mm 30 15 30 Actuating time for 240/1201) 120/601) 240/1201) s rated travel 1) Actuating time in case of s ˗ fail-safe action Stem 2500 Positioning force extends in N Stem 2500 retracts

-31

-36

With Actuator stem Actuator extends stem retracts ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗ ☑ ☑ ˗ ˗ 15 15 120/601)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

120/601)

12 2000 500

Page 212 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Technical data Type

3374

Power supply Power consumption

VA

Switch off Perm. ambient temperature Storage temperature

-10

-11

-15

-21

-26

-31

-36

230 V, +10/–15 %, 50/60 Hz 24 V, +10/–15 %, 50/60 Hz 120 V (90 to 132 V), 60 Hz Max. 18 Torque-dependent

°C

5 to 60

°C

–20 to +70

Degree of protection Overvoltage category Design and inspection Class of protection Noise immunity Noise emission Manual override

IP 54 according to DIN IEC 529 · Suspended mounting not permissible! IP 65 with cable glands (M20x1.5 with metal nut SW 23/24) II EN 61 010 Edition 3.94 II EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 Hex wrench · No adjustment possible after fail-safe action is triggered Manual override in actuators with safety function only possible when op. voltage is connected

Digital positioner

Additional electrical equipment Limit switches Two travel-dependent adjustable limit switches 250 V AC, 3 A Two potentiometers: 0 to 1000 Ω (900 Ω at rated travel), Potentiometers max. 1m · Not with version inc. positioner Input and output 0(4) to 20 mA · 0(2) to 10 V Can be selected using selector switch · Additional setOperating modes tings can be determined using TROVIS-VIEW and can be transferred using a PC or memory pen Linear or freely determinable characteristic · Adjustable Characteristic over TROVIS-VIEW Travel adjustment During automatic initialization procedure Data transmission with settings, operating status, error Interface messages per SAMSON interface protocol For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. 1)

Table 9.4.7.2.-1:  Technical data of Type 3374-XX

Half the actuating time for actuators with 50 Hz mains frequency

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 213 of 292

Version for three-point stepping signal L Ce

eL Actuator stem retracts

Ce

–

+

N

N

L

aL eL N

N

L

aL Actuator stem extends

Magnet for version with fail-safe action

Limit switches (optional)

Potentiometer (optional)

41 44 42 51 54 52

81 82 83 a

91 92 93 e

81

e

82

a

83

Version with digital positioner Limit switches (optional) 41 44 42 51 54 52

mA V + _ +

+

V mA _ + +

V_

31 32 33 13 12 11 81 82 Position transmitter

Input

Binary input

+ V_

L

N

83 84

L

N

Binary output max. 25 mA

Magnet only for version with fail-safe action Power supply

Figure 9.4.7.2.-2:  Wiring diagram

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 214 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.8.  Electric Actuator Type 3375 This linear actuator is controlled by three-point stepping signals issued by an electronic controller. It is suitable for mounting on SAMSON Series 3240 and 3250 Valves. Versions: Without safety function Type 3375-10 Thrust:

12.5 kN

Rated travel:

30 mm

Nom. transit time: 50 s (with 50 Hz) Power supply:

230 V, 50/60 Hz

Type 3375-11 Thrust:

12.5 kN

Rated travel:

60 mm

Nom. transit time: 100 s (with 50 Hz) Power supply:

230 V, 50/60 Hz

Principle of operation The electric actuators consist of an asynchronous motor and a maintenance-free planetary gear with ball screw. The motor is switched off by torque-dependent switches when the end positions are reached or in case of overload. Technical data Type Safety function Direction of action Valve connection over Rated travel Transit time for rated travel with 50 Hz (with 60 Hz) Power supply Operating mode (DIN VDE 0530)

3375

-11 Without

mm

M30x1.5 30

M60x1.5 60

s

50 (42)

100 (84)

Extends Retracts Power consumption VA Deactivation Perm. ambient temperature Storage temperature Thrust [kN]

-10

230 V, 50/60 Hz ±10 % S3 - 50 % ED (1200 c/h) 12.5 12.5 180 Torque-dependent +5 °C to +60 °C -20 °C to +70 °C

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 215 of 292

Technical data IP 54 acc. to IEC 529 (IP 65 with cable Degree of protection gland) Suspended mounting position not permitted Overvoltage category II Design and inspection EN 61010 edition 3.94 Class of protection II Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Noise emission EN 61000-6-3 Override Handwheel Additional equipment Limit switch Two pcs., 250 VAC, 3 A Potentiometer Two pcs., 0 to 1000 Ω For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.8.-1:  Technical data

41

81

44 42 51 54 52

82 83

a

e

91 92 93

a

e

eL aL

M >

*)

L

N

L1

eL

ce

aL

c

e53

e

*) Only for actuators with safety function Figure 9.4.8.-2:  Electrical Actuator Type 3375 - Wiring

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

a43

Page 216 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.9.  Electro-mechanical Actuators - PSL Overview

PSL202/AMS PSL204/AMS PSL208/AMS PSL210/AMS PSL214/AMS PSL320/AMS PSL325/AMS

up to 2.3 kN up to 4.5 kN up to 8.0 kN up to 10 kN up to 14 kN up to 20 kN up to 25 kN

PSL320 PSL325 20 kN to 25 kN

PSL201 PSL202 PSL204 1 kN to 4.5 kN

PSL208 PSL210 8 kN to 10 kN

PSL214 14 kN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 217 of 292

PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators

For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting on SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280. Actuator Type

PSL 202 PSL 202.1 PSL 202.2

PSL 201 PSL 201.1

24V/115V/230V Power supply 50 Hz or 60 Hz, 24 V DC Power consumption Motor protection

25.9 to 41 VA

37 to 54 VA

44 to 68 VA

65 to 138 VA

Thermal switch

S2 30 min S4 50% ED - 1200 c/h

Conduit entries M 20x1.5

2 pcs.

Enclosure acc. to EN 60529

IP65 (Standard, customizing possible)

Nominal thrust

1.0 kN

2.0 kN

4.5 kN

8.0 kN

Rated travel

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

50 mm

0.25 mm/s

0.5 to 1.4 mm/s

0.5 to 1.4 mm/s

0.5 to 1.0 mm/s

Velocity (at 50 Hz) Handwheel

Handwheel knob

Handwheel diameter

59 mm

Pillar distance

100 mm (Standard, customizing possible)

Permitted ambient temperature

-20 to +80 °C, modulating duty up to +60 °C

Position indication

Rotation lock on mounting pillars

Mounting position

Any position, except cover pointing downwards

Positioner

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Heating Resistor

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 limit switches

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 potentiometer

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Position

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cover Materials

PSL208 PSL208.1

24V/115V/230V/400V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, 12 V or 24 V DC

Blockable motor

Duty cycle as per IEC 60034-1-8

Options

PSL204 PSL204.1 PSL204.2

Gear case

Polycarbonat (Standard, customizing possible) High quality aluminium die casting

Pillar

Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104

Feedback rod

Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.9.-1:  PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators PSL 201 to PSL 208

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 218 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators

For process engineering and industrial applications and they are suitable for mounting on SAMSON Valves the Series 3240, 3250 and 3280. Actuator Type

PSL 210

PSL 214

65 to 138 VA

43 to 55 VA

Motor protection

3 pcs.

2 pcs. IP65

IP67

IP65

IP65

Nominal thrust

10.0 kN

14.0 kN

20.0 kN

25.0 kN

Rated travel

50 mm

65 mm

100 mm

100 mm

0.45 mm/s

0.45 mm/s

1.0 mm/s

1.0 mm/s

Velocity (at 50 Hz) Handwheel

Handwheel knob

Handwheel

59 mm

100 mm

Handwheel diameter Pillar distance

100 mm

155 mm

Permitted ambient temperature

-20 to +80 °C, modulating duty up to +60 °C

Position indication

Rotation lock on mounting pillars

Mounting position

Any position, except cover pointing downwards

Positioner

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Heating Resistor

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 limit switches

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 potentiometer

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Position

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Polycarbonat

Cast aluminium

Cover Materials

86 to 119 VA

S2 30 min S4 50% ED - 1200 c/h

Conduit entries M 20x1.5

Options

86 to 119 VA

Thermal switch

Duty cycle as per IEC 60034-1-8 Enclosure acc. to EN 60529

PSL 325

24V/115V/230V/400V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, 24 V DC

Power supply Power consumption

PSL 320

Gear case

Deep drawn steel plate

High quality aluminium die casting

Pillar

Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104

Feedback rod

Non-corrosive steel DIN 1.4104

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Table 9.4.9.-2:  PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators PSL 210 to PSL 325

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 219 of 292

9.4.9.1  PSL Electro-mechanical Actuators The cover and switching mechanism design of the PSL valve actuators for a wider range of applications, with more space for electronics and reduced cost. The PSL valve actuators fulfil all requirements for control valve actuators with remarkable efficiency. They position precisely, are very robust, reliable with long life, even at high loads. The individual components are of high quality and correspond to the harmonised European standards for machines and electrical equipment. The basic adjustment of a PSL actuator on a valve is simple due to the central arrangement of the switching and sensor units, which are easily accessible. Optional accessories are quickly retrofittable due to the unique, perfected modular design. Users of the PSL linear and PSQ quarter-turn actuators profit from the unified modular concept of the accessories in several ways. There are fewer parts which need to be held in stock and the training for the sales, service and assembly personnel is reduced considerably.

1 2

6

7 11 3

8 9

12 5 4

Figure 9.4.9.1.-1:  Modular accessories, easy retrofitting even on site

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

10

Page 220 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Characteristics for simple handling and for long, trouble-free operation which only PSL actuators can offer in their class: The tight cover, made of high-quality polycarbonate, sheet steel or cast aluminium 1 allows outdoor installation. High-quality and high-efficiency motor used for a precise positioning and 2 controlling with high duty cycle. Spur gear with minimum backlash and low wear for precise positioning of the 3 valve stem; high actuator output stiffness due to self-locking drive. The proven disc spring coupling provides a defined setting force and tight closing; 4 the rotation lock serves as a mechanical stroke indicator. The mounting pillars made of non-corrosive steel for simple, versatile mounting 5 to the valve. Comfortable hand operation without switching from motor to manual operation; 6 the handwheel simultaneously indicates the operation and direction of operation and helps during failure diagnosis. 7 Easily adjustable limit and signal switches. 8 Additional stroke switches or intermediate switches 9 Single or double potentiometer. 10 Space heater. 11 Electronic position transmitter. 12 Electronic positioner. Table 9.4.9.1.-2:  Characteristics for simple handling of PSL actuators

Figure 9.4.9.1.-3:  Smart linear actuator with fail-safe unit on a globe valve

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 221 of 292

9.4.9.2  PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators PS-AMS is the patented smart actuator solution of PS Automation GmbH for linear actuators up to 25 kN thrust and quarter-turn actuators up to 1000 Nm torque. The new generation PSAMS11/ 12/13 was developed from the proven PS-AMS01/02/03, is available for various voltages, and mechanical adaptation to most types of valves can be done.

4

1

5

2

6 3

7

Figure 9.4.9.2.-1:  PS-AMS

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 222 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators Speed-controlled actuation 1

The output is generated by a 24 VDC motor, which is controlled by the electronics via pulse width modulation (PWM), i.e. it is operated at variable speed. Absolutecoded feedback is done with a precision potentiometer. PS-AMS standard equipment comprises positioner and active feedback function, automatic commissioning as well as comprehensive diagnostics functions.

Mechanical design 2

The mechanical part of the PS-AMS actuator consists of the components of PS Automation's standard actuators with their well-proven components, namely a robust spur gear with trapezoidal thread in PSL-AMS, and a high-reduction planetary differential gearbox with a handwheel permanently engaged via a worm gear in PSQ-AMS. All PS actuators are lubricated for life and therefore maintenance-free.

Electrical connection

3

The electrical wiring of PSL-AMS is done directly to terminal blocks in the integrated terminal box. PSQ-AMS uses a plug-and-socket system with robust screw clamps in a separately attached housing. The plug can be removed without interfering with any existing cables, e.g. for maintenance or exchange of the actuator.

Parameterization by Software

4

Our concept of monitoring current and voltage permits adaptation of the actuator functions to the process conditions in many ways. Via our communication software PSCS it is possible to adjust valve-specific details, actuation thrust/ torque and speed, to configure alerts, and to do a freely programmable valve curve correction.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators Diagnostics function

5

The diagnostics function of the communication software PSCS allows to retrieve counting values (such as operating hours, number of start-ups and running time of motor) and sets of running parameters (such as the analogue set value input, actual position value, currently required motor torque and inside temperature of the actuator). The actual values can be graphically displayed and analyzed using the monitor function. Thus the PS-AMS concept allows pro-active maintenance and as a result an increase in process safety. We are currently preparing a combined monitoring system which will also give a trend prognosis of the wear situation of the PS-AMS actuator.

Wireless communication

6

Due to the continual further development and optimizing of the electronics and the communication protocol, the signal processing inside the actuator and the communication to the outside are now designed to work even faster and more reliably. Communication is feasible via special communication software PSCS from the PC or wireless via Bluetooth protocol from PC or PDA. Status indication & Automatic commissioning

7

The permanent optical status signalled by two LEDs was revised in order to make the indicated messages even clearer. All operating conditions or fault functions are now uniquely signalled by specific optical sequences. Automatic adjustment is started in an user-friendly way by a pushbutton. Table 9.4.9.2.-2:  PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 223 of 292

Page 224 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.9.3  Optional Accessories PS-AMS The All-In-One Actuators Local control PSC.2 The optionally available lockable local control box PSC.2 allows on site operation and can also be used to set most of the actuator-specific values. The display of actual position, messages and parameters of the actuator is in full text.

Integrated process controller PSIC The integrated process controller PSIC, available as optional accessory, reads the signal of a process sensor as actual value of the process and then positions the actuator according to either a modulating process set value, or a programmed fixed value. The concept of PS-AMS using an electric motor with 24 VDC supply voltage facilitates a simple power supply to the actuator via photo voltaic cells, allowing to install a full control loop at remote locations independently of supply and signal lines which may be difficult to lay.

Fieldbus / Bluetooth interfaces The main board is prepared for the optional installation of modules for all common field bus interfaces or Bluetooth protocol, which enables wireless parameterization and read-out of diagnostics of the actuator at distances of up to 10 m.

Fail-safe unit PSEP The fail-safe device PSEP is based on an accumulator with controlled charger, so that a safety position in case of loss of power supply can be freely defined without any mechanical alterations to the actuator.

Table 9.4.9.3.-1:  Optional Accessories

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 225 of 292

9.4.9.4  Mounting the PSL Actuator onto the Valves SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, and 3280. The standard actuator mounting method is described below. Mounting is simplified for several types of valves for which special modifications to the actuator can be obtained. Should this be the case, see the separately attached description for mounting instructions. The actuator and / or valve 11

1 2

10 9

3

8

4

7

5 6

1 = stroke scale 2 = spindle nut with locking device 3 = safety pin 4 = coupling piece 5 = valve mounting plate 6 = fastening nut 7 = valve body 8 = valve spindle 9 = swivel nut 10 = disc springs 11 = mounting pedestals

Figure 9.4.9.4.-1:  Mounting the actuator on the valve

The valve must be suitably equipped to take the mounting pedestals. Please see the individual dimension sheets for the actuator dimensions. Observe the following steps when mounting the actuator: „„ Unscrew the swivel nut (item 9) from the spindle nut (item 2) and slide it over the valve spindle (item 8). „„ See if the bore of the coupling piece fits the valve spindle. If necessary, rebore and/or recut the thread. „„ Slide or screw the coupling piece (item 4) onto the valve spindle and bore or pin to the valve spindle (disc springs, see chapter 8.2). „„ Slide the valve spindle with the coupling piece and disc springs (item 10) into the spindle nut, screw on the swivel nut and tighten down using the cross slotted key supplied. „„ Slide the actuating pedestals (item 11) into the bore holes of the valve mounting plate and tighten with the fastening nuts. 9.4.9.5  Type of limit cut-off The type of limit switch cut-off is dependent on the type of valve and the limit position: „„ Force/stroke-dependent cut-off (cf. 9.2) „„ Stroke-dependent cut-off (cf. 9.3)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 226 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

The force/stroke-dependent cut-off limit switches can be set by means of compressing the disc spring coupling (Fig. 6 and 7). Various types of valves require special couplings, which are described in a separate instruction sheet enclosed. The following method of setting the cut-off is for a standard coupling. Even here special variations are possible and where applicable, they are also described in a separately attached sheet.

A

B

C

Figure 9.4.9.5.-1:  Standard disc spring coupling

The different methods of arranging the discs are dependent on the type of valve. Three different methods are possible: A: Arrangement for a through-valve with "Valve Spindle retracting" as direction of closing. B: Arrangement for a through valve with "Valve Spindle extending" as direction of closing. C: Arrangement for a 3-way valve. Basic rule: „„ For a through-valve, first set the CLOSED position force/stroke-dependent, then the OPEN position stroke-dependent „„ For a 3-way valve set both limit positions force/stroke-dependent. 9.4.9.6  Force/stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off „„ Using the handwheel on the actuator, drive the valve into the limit position until the valve cone touches the valve seat. This occurs when the valve spindle nut starts to move axially and the spindle pushes against the disc spring force. „„ Mark the position on one of the drive support pedestals at the rotation protection piece. „„ Continue to drive the actuator in the same direction until the disc springs are compressed to the required amount (see the specific data sheet for the drive) as denoted on the spring/force diagram. „„ Slacken-off the fixing screw on the corresponding switching cam (Figure 9.4.9.6.-2), move the cam towards the limit switch until it clicks, and re-tighten the fixing screw. „„ Check the setting by repeating the drive action to close the valve and check that the spring discs are compressed to the correct stroke. Re-adjust the cam if required.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 227 of 292

Figure 9.4.9.6.-1:  Disc spring stroke

PSL214

1

2

1 = Retracting spindle nut (OPEN) 2 = Extending spindle nut (CLOSE) Figure 9.4.9.6.-2:  Adjusting switching cams

Figure 9.4.9.6.-3:  Spring pressure graph

Note: 3-way valves using the spring disc arrangement "C" (Figure 9.4.9.5.-1) require only half of the spring stroke designated in the spring diagram! Once the end position is established, glue on the stroke indicator scale onto a drive pedestal. 9.4.9.7  Stroke-dependent limit switch cut-off The spring discs are not compressed for the stroke dependent limit switch cut-off. „„ Using the handwheel on the actuator, drive the valve until the end required is reached. „„ Slacken-off the fixing screw on the corresponding switching cam (Figure 9.4.9.6.-2, move the cam towards the limit switch until it activates, and re-tighten the fixing screw. Figure 9.4.9.7.-1:  Segment Ball Valve Type 3310 with Electric Actuator and Handwheel Type PSQ 123

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 228 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.9.8  Electric Supply The mains connecting cables must be suitably dimensioned to accept the max. current requirement of the actuator, and correspond to IEC 227 and IEC 245. The yellow-green coloured cables may only be used for connecting to earth. When inserting the cable through the drive cable connector, ensure that the max. bending radius for the cable is observed. The PSL electric actuators do not have an internal electrical power switch. A switch or power mains switch has therefore to be provided in the building installation. This should be positioned close to the device and be easily accessible to the user and shall be labelled as the mains isolator switch for the actuator. The building installation must also provide for power surge trips or fuses corresponding to standard IEC 364-4-41 with protection Class 1, for the actuator connections. 9.4.9.9  Wiring diagram Figure 9.4.9.9.-1 indicates the electrical connections for standard actuators. The wiring diagram inside the actuator cover is binding for the specific actuator connection. See the separate wiring diagram in the corresponding service instructions for any optional extras. 1 2 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

X3 X2

X4/16 X4/14 X4/15

X1

X10

2 1

X9

3 2 1

X8

3 2 1

X7

6 5 4 3 2 1

X5/2 X5/4 X5/7 X5/6 X5/1

X6

6 5 4 3 2 1

X1 = Internal wiring X2 = Internal wiring X3 = Internal wiring X4 = Potentiometer connection for PSAP X5/1 = Neutral X5/2 = Motor phase to open X5/4 = Motor phase to close X5/6 = Thermo switch as potential-free contact X5/7 = Thermo switch as potential-free contact X6 = Additional position switch X7 = not used X8 = heating resistor X9 = Potentiometer 2 PE = Earth connection on housing

PE Figure 9.4.9.9.-1:  Wiring terminals

Two adjustable limit switches are installed to limit the stroke of the actuator, and cut-off the motor current in the relative direction. Most motors have a thermal switch, depending on the actuator type, to cut off the current in both directions when a maximum temperature is reached (only at standard single

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 229 of 292

phase power supply). The thermal switch loop is closed by the bridge between the X5/6 and X5/7 connections (see Figure 9.4.9.9.-1). If desired, the thermo switch can be wired to be monitored from the outside as follows: „„ Remove the bridge between connections X5/6 and X5/7. „„ Exchange the connections X1/11 and X1/13. „„ Make a conductivity check between connections X5/6 and X5/7(resistance has to be zero) „„ Connect the thermo switch as potential-free contact to the connections X5/6 and X5/7. 9.4.9.10  Maximum thermal switch loading The thermo switch can be loaded as a maximum to the nominal load of the motor (see motor nameplate).

X5

7 6 4 2 1 0

X5

12 V / 24 V DC

13 14 15 16 11 12 17 18 19 20

3-Phase AC

Position

t

PE

1 2 4

PE

1-Phase AC

Position

t

Close Open

Position

L2

M2

L1

N

=

F

M1

N

L2

L1

t

L3

Index B

S R

R

S

Close

X9

Heating 1 2

1 2 3

X4

Additional Potentiometer 2

L

X6

16 15 14

Additional Potentiometer 1

L

1 2 3 4 5 6

Additional Position Switch

Open Figure 9.4.9.10.-1:  Wiring diagram

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

t

X8

X5

Page 230 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.10.  Electric actuators outside source Linear Actuator Type SAM 2 kN to 25 kN

Linear Actuator AUMA Thrusts from 4 kN to 217 kN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 231 of 292

Electric actuators used in process engineering applications. They are suitable for mounting on SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, and 3280 Valves. SAM Three-point stepping

Auma Three-point stepping

Auma Three-point stepping

Mode of operation

Linear

Linear

Part-turn

Fail-safe function

Without

Without

Without

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 400 V (±10 %), 50 Hz

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 400 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 440 V (±10 %), 60 Hz

230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 400 V (±10 %), 50 Hz 440 V (±10 %), 60 Hz

Power consumption

60 to 337 W

80 to 750 W

80 to 750 W

Degree of protection

IP 65

IP 68

IP 68

Actuator Type

Power supply

Protection class Thermoswitches (NC) Nominal thrust

2 to 25 kN

4 to 217 kN

4 to 217 kN

15, 30, 60 and 120 mm

50 to 500 mm

50 to 500 mm

15 to 50 mm/min

20 to 360 mm/min

20 to 360 mm/min

Yes

Yes

Yes

M30 x 1.5, M60 x 1.5, M100 x 1.5

B1 according EN ISO 5210

B1 according EN ISO 5210

Noise immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

Noise emission

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

EN 61000-6-3

Input signal

0 to 10 V 0 (4) to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

Out put signal

0 (4) to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

Ambient

-20 to 60 °C

-25 to 80 °C -40 to 60 °C

0 to 50 °C

At connecting stem

0 to 120 °C

0 to 120 °C

0 to 130 °C

Limit switches

2 torque-dependent 3 travel-dependent

2 torque-dependent 3 travel-dependent

2 torque-dependent 3 travel-dependent

Potentiometer

1 or 2 piece 100, 200 or 1000 Ω

0 to 1000 Ω

0 to 1000 Ω

15 W

5W

5W

Rated travel Transit time for rated travel Handwheel Connecting

Digital positioner Permissible temperatures

Options

Thread

Heating resistor Materials

Thermoswitches (NC) Thermoswitches (NC) PTC thermistors (PTC) PTC thermistors (PTC)

Housing

High quality aluminium casting

High quality aluminium High quality aluminium casting casting

Actuator pictures

For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical data sheet. Figure 9.4.10.-1:  Electro-mechanical actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 232 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.10.1  Linear Actuator Type SAM Application Electric actuators designed for control valves used in process engineering applications. They are especially suitable for valves of Series 3240, 3250 and 3280. Nominal thrusts Rated travels

2 kN to 25 kN

15 to 120 mm

These electric linear actuators contain reversible AC or three-phase AC motors. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the actuator stem via a gear unit and the corresponding transfer elements. Versions are available with 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase AC motor for connection to three-point stepping controllers. Transit times range from 18 to 144 seconds. The standard versions include a mechanical handwheel. The following limit switches and signalizing components are included in the standard hardware: „„ Two torque-dependent switches Figure 9.4.10.1.-1:  Type SAM electric „„ Three travel-dependent switches Optional electrical equipment:

actuators attached to Globe Valve Type 3284

„„ Brake motors (required for positioners) „„ One or two potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω „„ One electronic position transmitter with an output signal from 4(0) to 20 mA „„ One positioner with input signals from 4(0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V Versions Standard version with surface-cooled squirrel-cage motor for 230 V AC or 400 V threephase alternating current. Equipped with two torque-dependent limit switches and three limit contacts. Motor with temperature monitor (optional for Type SAM -01 to -23). Type SAM -01 and SAM -1x ∙ Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 2 kN (SAM -01 and SAM -10) to 6 kN (SAM -13). Type SAM -2x ∙ Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kN (SAM -20) to 15 kN (SAM -23). Type SAM -3x ∙ Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kN (SAM -30) to 15 kN (SAM -33). Type SAM -4x ∙ Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kN (SAM -40) to 25 kN (SAM -42). Type SAM -5x ∙ Electric actuator with 120 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kN (SAM -50) to 25 kN (SAM -52).

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 233 of 292

9.4.10.2  Principle of operation The actuator motor converts the output pulses of the three-point stepping controller into steps of travel. The length of these steps and the direction of rotation depend on the quantity and the sign of the control deviation. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the gear wheel via the gearing; the gear wheel is shrunk on a bushing with female thread. The top section of the actuator stem which is provided with the matching male thread engages the female thread. Due to the rotary motion of the gear wheel and bushing, the actuator stem screws into the female thread and performs a lifting, linear motion. The actuators can be adjusted manually after disengagement of the motor. All versions are equipped with two torquedependent and three travel-dependent limit switches which stop the motor when the predetermined limits are reached. These electrical components are housed below the sealed cover where they are separated from the gearing and protected from moisture and dust. They can be easily accessed after lifting off the cover. The torque-dependent switches (S1 and S2 in Fig. 4) switch off the motor when the adjusted force is reached, e.g., when the valve plug rests against the seat or when the linear motion is obstructed in any way. The three floating travel-dependent switches (S3 to S5) issue a limit signal when the adjusted limit values are exceeded. Usually, one switch (S3) is used to limit the travel in the opening direction of the control valve. Whereas the other two switches (S4 and S5) indicate intermediate or end positions. The electric actuators can optionally be equipped with two potentiometers and/or an electric position transmitter with an output signal from 4 (0) to 20 mA. They are Figure 9.4.10.2.-1:  Sectional drawing of used for analog remote transmission of the Electric Actuator Type SAM valve position. It is also possible to install a positioner with input signals 4 (0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V when AC brake motors for 230 V, 50 Hz are used. The installation and start-up for three-phase AC brake motors involve considerably more work because additional external reversing contactors are required.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 234 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Technical data Type Nominal thrust Rated travel Speed of response

SAM- 01 10 kN 2

2

11

12

13 20 21 22

23

30 31 32

33

40 41 42 50 51 52

3.5

4.5

6

15

6

15

15 20 25 15 20 25

Standard Optional mm/min 15

6

8

12

30 15 17 34

17 ∙ 25 ∙ 50

Connecting thread Degree of protection Perm. ambient temperature

13.5 ∙ 25 ∙ 50

M30 x 1.5

8

12

60 30 13.5 13.5 ∙ 25 22 ∙ 50 40 M60 x 1.5

13.5 22 40

120 60 25 ∙ 50 M100 x 1.5

IP 65 -20 to +60 °C

Table 9.4.10.2.-2:  Technical data of electrical Actuator Type SAM

Electric connection data 01

Type Speed of response

SAM-

10 11 12

13

20 21 30 31

20 30 21 31

22 23 32 33

20 21 22 30 31 32

23 33

40 ∙ 50 41 ∙ 51 42 ∙ 52

17 50 17 34 13.5 25 13.5 22 50 40 25 50 25 230 V/50 Hz 0.029 0.16 0.18 0.16 0.18 0.1 0.225 0.145 0.225 0.7 0.7 0.66 0.93 Motor and 400 V/50 Hz 0.015 0.11 0.08 0.11 0.08 0.062 0.11 0.85 0.11 0.29 0.29 0.4 0.7 power Asynchronous motor Version Synchronous motor 1) consumption in A Temperatur Only on request, not required Bimetallic release monitoring Table 9.4.10.2.-3:  Electric connection data 1) Actuators

mm/min 15

with positioner require brake motors Electrical equipment

2 torque-dependent switches Standard version 3 travel-dependent switches Motor coil with temperature monitor (see Table 9.4.10.2.-3) 1 or 2 potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω 1 position transmitter with output 4(0) to 20 mA Options 1 positioner with input 4(0) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V (only with brake or synchronous motor) 1 heating resistor with temperature monitor Table 9.4.10.2.-4:  Electrical equipment

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 235 of 292

9.4.10.3  Electrical connection The electric actuators can be connected in three ways: 1) via internal terminal blocks (standard version), 2) via 32-pin terminal blocks in a terminal box or 3) via a compact connector. A 10-pin plug insert (silver-plated sockets and pins) is used to connect the motor; a 24-pin unit containing either silver or gold-plated contacts is used to connect the limit switches and signalizing equipment. When a plug connector is used, only one potentiometer (R1) can be provided in case a fourth travel-dependent switch (S6) is desired. The travel-dependent switch S3 must be adjusted in such a way that the travel of the final control element is limited in the opening direction by switching off the motor.

Klemmenanschluß

Figure 9.4.10.3.-1:  Wiring diagram of Type SAM

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 236 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.  Electronic actuators of Company AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG

Figure 9.4.11.-1:  Oil and gas markets open for new AUMA actuators

Generation .2 products from the modular electric actuator specialist offer weatherproof functionality (IP 68) and II2G Ex de IIC T4 has been gained for use in potentially explosive atmospheres. Enhanced functionality provided in the Generation .2 range that are advancements over the company’s original product series include extended lifetime, larger temperature range and improved corrosion protection. Benefits for demanding applications include a new coating offering superior corrosion protection at highest mechanical resistance and a version for modulating duty offers an extended speed range / improved modulating accuracy. Development focus for Generation .2 centred on improved handling and operation. An enlarged plug-in electrical connection provides improved connection facilities, a single motor plug/socket connection is incorporated and AUMA’s proven handwheel activation was optimised.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 237 of 292

Integral controls for Generation .2 actuators are equipped with Bluetooth interfaces. With the integration of torque, temperature and vibration sensors, new intelligent diagnostic functions supply significant actuator status information such as torque characteristics which can be captured at any time. Actuator feedback signals can be classified according to NAMUR recommendation NE 107 and integrated into Asset Management systems. Full compatibility with the company’s previous products is offered. AUMA has a wide modular product range with electric multi-turn, part-turn, linear and lever actuators, as well as several different valve gearboxes. AUMA actuator controls, on request micro-processor controlled and available with a variety of fieldbus interfaces, enable an ideal connection of the MOVs to the process control. This makes it possible to find the suitable automation solution for almost every valve. Linear actuators are a combination of the multi-turn actuators SA and the linear thrust unit LE. The linear actuators are available for open-close duty and modulating service: „„ Thrusts from 4 kN to 217 kN „„ Strokes from 50 mm to 500 mm „„ Velocity from 20 mm/min to 360 mm/min 9.4.11.1  Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.2 to SAR 30.2 Multi-turn actuators SAR 07.1 to SAR 30.1 are designed for intermittent duty S4 - 25 %. Special versions for S4 - 50 % and S5 - 25 % are also available. Actuators of the type range SAR 07.1 - SAR 16.1 can be combined with different controls. From the simple OPEN-CLOSE control to the micro-controlled version with logging of operating data or fieldbus interface.

Figure 9.4.11.1.-1:  Auma matic Type SA 07.2 to SA 16.2

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 238 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Design features: „„ Torque range from 15 Nm to 4,000 Nm „„ Modulating range from 15 Nm to 1,600 Nm „„ Max. number of starts 1,200 c/h „„ Output speeds from 4 to 45 rpm „„ Limit and torque seating „„ Available with 3-ph AC, 1-ph AC motors „„ Handwheel for manual operation

Figure 9.4.11.1.-2:  Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 – SA 16.1/SAR 07.1 – SAR 16.1 without integral controls (AUMA NORM) „„ Torques from 10 to 1,000 Nm

Ambient conditions: „„ High enclosure protection „„ High quality corrosion protection „„ Wide ambient temperature ranges Options: „„ Switches in tandem version „„ Remote position transmitter „„ Magnetic limit and torque transmitter „„ Mechanical position indicator

Figure 9.4.11.1.-3:  Multi-turn actuators SA 25.1 – SA 48.1 /SAR 25.1 – SAR 30.1 without integral controls (AUMA NORM) „„ Torques from 630 to 32,000 Nm

Interfaces: „„ Electrical connection via AUMA plug/ socket connector (optionally terminals) „„ Cable glands in different versions „„ Output drive types according to ISO or DIN standard Applications Power Oil & gas „„ Conventional power plants (coal, gas, oil) „„ Exploration, offshore plants „„ Hydroelectric power plants

„„ Refineries

„„ Geothermal power plants

„„ Distribution

„„ Solar thermal power plants

„„ Gas tanks

„„ Biogas power plants

„„ Tank farms

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 239 of 292

Applications Water sector „„ Sewage treatment plants

Industrial and special solutions: „„ Air conditioning

„„ Water treatment plants

„„ Food industry

„„ Drinking water distribution

„„ Chemical/pharmaceutical industry

„„ Seawater desalination

„„ Vessel and submarine shipbuilding

„„ Steel construction for water resources

„„ Steel mills „„ Paper industry „„ Cement works „„ Mining

Table 9.4.11.1.-4:  Applications

9.4.11.2  Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators The linear thrust unit converts the rotary movement of the actuator output shaft into a linear movement. The combination of a multi-turn actuator and linear thrust unit forms a linear actuator.

Figure 9.4.11.2.-1:  Linear thrust unit LE

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 240 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.3  Range of application AUMA linear thrust units Type LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 are designed for the operation of industrial valves, such as e.g. Globe valves. They are used in combination with multi-turn actuators on valves which require linear travel. The linear thrust units convert the output torque of the multi-turn actuator into an axial thrust. As an option, the AUMA linear thrust units is available with damping device to compensate for changes in length caused by varying temperatures, for example. For other applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for any possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated applications. Such risk lies entirely with the user. Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the designated use.

Figure 9.4.11.3.-1:  Globe Valves Type 3251 with AUMA SAR and linear thrust unit LE

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 241 of 292

Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators Features and functions Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for open-close duty (SA): Shorttime duty S2 Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for modulating duty Type of duty (SAR): Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % based on maximum thrust for modulating torque. Self-locking Yes Input speeds Refer to separate technical data Standard: LH: Clockwise rotation, i.e. actuator closes the valve in a clockwise rotation Versions Option: RH: Counterclockwise rotation, i.e. actuator closes the valve in a counterclockwise rotation

Thrust max. kN

1)

Thrust max. for modulating duty kN Stroke max. mm

LE 12.1

LE 25.1

LE 50.1

LE 70.1

LE 100.1 LE 200.1

11.5

23

37.5

64

128

217

6

12

20

30

52

87

50 to 500

50 to 500

63 to 400

80 to 400

80 to 400

100 to 500

2)

2.6

2.6

3.2

3.9

3.9

4.6

Base weight approx. kg

11

11

11

40

40

40

Factor

Valve attachment Valve attachment Dimensions according to DIN 3358 (refer to Table 9.4.11.4.-3) Thread of valve stem Output drive types

LE 12.1

LE 25.1

LE 50.1

LE 70.1

LE 100.1 LE 200.1

26 x 5 LH

26 x 5 LH

32 x 6 LH

40 x 7 LH

40 x 7 LH

48 x 8 LH

Service conditions Enclosure protection Standard: IP 67 Protection against short-time immersion into water; according to EN 60 529 max. 1.0 m for 30 min.

Standard: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently

aggressive atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration (e.g. in Corrosion protection wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)

Option: KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high humidity and high pollutant concentration Finish coating base Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination Color base Ambient temperature

Grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007) Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C Options: 0 °C to + 120 °C (high temperature) – 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature)

Special features for use in potentially explosive atmospheres 3) The test to ensure the conformity with ATEX directive 94/9/EC were performed according to the technical data. For other applications, please consult AUMA. 100 % load may only be applied for a short time during opening and closing. During running operation, sufficient pause times have to be respected. The type of duty must not be exceeded.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 242 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators Linear thrust unit with multi-turn actuator for short-time duty (SAExC): ShortType of duty time duty S2, max. 3 cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN) based on mean thrust and standard ambient temperature. Thrust max. for modulating duty [kN] Explosion protection

LE 12.1

LE 25.1

LE 50.1

LE 70.1

LE 100.1

LE 200.1

6

12

153)

30

42

72

Linear thrust unit: II2G c IIC T4 according to ATEX CD 94/9/EC Multi-turn Actuator: II2G c IIC T4 according to ATEX CD 94/9/EC – 20 °C to + 40 °C

Ambient temperature

– 40 °C to + 40 °C (low temperature) – 60 °C to + 40 °C (extreme low temperature) Options: only in combination with SAExC Combinations with actuators SA(R)ExC at ambient temperatures > 40 °C with special sizing.

Standard:

Further information EU Directives

ATEX Directive: (94/9/EC) Machinery Directive: (98/37/EC)

Information “Electric actuators and valve gearboxes according to ATEX …” Reference documents Dimension sheet LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 with SA(R) or SA(R)ExC Technical data sheets LE with SA(R) or SA(R)ExC. 1)

for max. setting of torque switching at actuator, tolerance ± 20 % Conversion factor for torque (T in Nm) into thrust (F in kN) for a mean adhesion factor of 0.15 (T = F x f) 3) For detailed information refer to separate technical data sheets: LE with SA(R)ExC 2)

Table 9.4.11.3.-2:  Technical data for Linear thrust unit LE 12.1 to LE 200.1 for multi-turn actuators

9.4.11.4  Mounting to valve Mounting is most easily done with the valve shaft pointing vertically upward. But mounting is also possible in any other position. Vertical mounting: On site, seal customer connection separately (e.g. with a roof covering the linear thrust unit). The linear thrust unit leaves the factory in position OPEN. The thrust rod is completely retracted. „„ For Globe Valves, the mounting position is end position OPEN. „„ Thoroughly decrease mounting faces of both linear thrust unit and valve. „„ Fit linear thrust unit so that bores or thread of mounting flange align with .the valve mounting flange. „„ Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the mounting faces are in complete contact. „„ Fasten linear thrust unit with screws (minimum quality 8.8) and lock washers. Fasten screws crosswise with a torque according to Table 9.4.11.4.-1. Thread

M8

M 10

M 12

M 16

M 20

Fastening torque TA in Nm

25

51

87

214

431

Table 9.4.11.4.-1:  Fastening torque TA

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 243 of 292

„„ Connect coupling stud (∅ d 8) of linear thrust unit with valve stem. The type of connection depends on the valve and is determined by the valve manufacturer.

Ø d4

L2

h

"X"

Ø d4

d3

H

Ø d8

L4

h3

h3

"X"

Ød9 Ø d2 Ø d1 Figure 9.4.11.4.-2:  Connection

Valve attachment dimensions according to DIN 3358 1) Dimensions

LE 12.1

LE 25.1

LE 50.1

LE 70.1

LE 100.1

LE 200.1

Mounting flange

F07 / F10

F07 / F10

F10

F14

F14

F16

□ 75 / 125 □ 75 / 125

125

175

175

210

Ød1 Ød2

552) / 70 f8

552) / 70 f8

70 g7 2)

100 f8

100 f8

130 f8

Ød3

70 / 102

70 / 102

102

140

140

165

Ød4

M8 / 112)

M8 / 112)

112)

182)

182)

M 20

Ød8

M12 x 1,25

M36 x 3

M36 x 3

M42 x 3

Ød9

42

42

55

70

70

100

h

3.42) / 3

3.42) / 3

3.42)

4

4

42)

h3/h4

20 / 15

20 / 15

15

18

18

32

E

18

21

24

26

26

29

L2

20

25

30

55

55

65

L4

45

50

54

75

75

90

M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5

1) For option with damping device: refer to separate dimension sheet "Linear thrust unit with spring-loaded damping device" 2) Dimensions outside DIN 3358 Table 9.4.11.4.-3:  Valve attachment dimensions according to DIN 3358

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 244 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Attachment of electric linear actuators with connections according to DIN 3358 Mounting to valve SAMSON Series 3240, 3250, 3280 Connection acc. to DIN 3358

Electric actuator

F07

F10

SAR/SARM

F10/14/16

SAR/SARM

Outside source

SAR/SARM

LE

LE

LE

Attachment kit Item numbers for Valve Series 3240 3250 3280

1170-0354

1170-0395

1170-0356 1170-0357 1170-0358 1170-0359 1170-0361

Table 9.4.11.4.-4:  Attachment of electric linear actuators with connections according to DIN 3358 Connection acc. to DIN 3358

F07

DN

15-150

NPS

1/2”-6”

DN Series 3250/3280 NPS

15-100 1/2”-4”

Series 3240

Attachment acc. to drawing No. 1170-

0354 AUMA Type:

F10

F14

F16

15-801) 200/250 200/250 200/250 100-150 1/2”-3”1) 8”-10” 8”-10” 8”-10” 4”-6” 15-100 125-200 50-100 125-2503) 250-5003) 125-2503) 250-5003) 1/2”-4” 6”-8” 1/2”-4” 6”-10”3) 10”-20”3) 6”-10”3) 10”-20”3) 0395 0356 AUMA Type:

Suitable for SAR/SARM SAR/SARM attachment to the 07.1+LE12.1 10.1+LE50.1 following electric SAR/SARM actuators: 2) 07.5+LE25.1 1) Max. permissible thrust is 15 kN 2) The attachment kit includes the standard yoke with modified bore pattern

0357

03582) 03592) AUMA Type:

SAR/SARM 14.1+LE70.1 SAR/SARM 14.5+LE100.1

3)

03602) 03612) AUMA Type: SAR/SARM 16.1+LE200.1

DN 250, up to seat bore 200

Table 9.4.11.4.-5:  Connections according to DIN 3358 for F07, F10, F14 and F16

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 245 of 292

9.4.11.5  Actuators without integral controls (AUMA NORM) On request, the actuator is equipped with a mechanical position indicator which can be used to view the valve position and also as running indication. The mechanical position indicator is clear and fully legible, even from a long distance. For AUMA NORM actuators, the actuator signals are exclusively processed by the external actuator controls. If signals generated within these controls are required as local indication, additional display elements and signal channels become necessary.

9.4.11.6  Actuators with integral controls Actuators with integral controls can also be equipped with the mechanical position indicator. Furthermore, the controls are complete with indication lights, or, in the case of the AUMATIC, a display, which indicate the operation status locally. For more detailed information on local indication, refer to the following brochures: „„ Product description Actuator controls AUMA MATIC „„ Product description Actuator controls AUMATIC The integral controls evaluate the actuator signals and operation commands and perform the required switching procedures automatically and without delay, using the installed switchgear, reversing contactors or thyristors. The controls make the evaluated actuator signals available to the higher level controls as feedback signals. Actuators with integral controls are ready for operation immediately after establishing the power supply and can be operated via the operating elements. 9.4.11.7  AUMA MATIC AM In its basic version, the AUMA MATIC is ideal for simple OPEN - CLOSE applications. The AUMA MATIC provides end position indication, the selector switch position and a collective fault signal, all as feedback signals. The behavior of the AUMA MATIC can be adapted to the application via programming switches, e.g. programming of the type of seating. Options: „„ Three-position controller „„ Fieldbus interface (Profibus DP or Modbus RTU) AUMA MATIC local controls with push buttons, selector switches and indication lights.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 246 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.8  AUMATIC AC As well as the AUMA MATIC’s basic functionality, the AUMATIC offers some other advantages, e.g. „„ Programmable signal relays „„ Non-intrusive setting (option) „„ Adaptive positioner (option) „„ Fieldbus interfaces for Profibus DP, Modbus RTU, DeviceNet, Foundation Fieldbus (option) „„ Monitoring and diagnostics „„ Logging of operating data „„ Cable-based or wireless programming interface for connecting a programming device

Figure 9.4.11.8.-1:  Operating and indication elements of the AUMATIC AC 01.2

AUMATIC local controls with push buttons for operation and programming, selector switch, display with plain text display, indication lights and programming interface.

Figure 9.4.11.8.-2:  A Step Beyond - AUMA Generation .2 With the Generation .2, AUMA introduces a significant further development for the increasing demands in all types of process plants, from the water industry and energy sector to the oil and gas industry.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 247 of 292

9.4.11.9  Electric rotary-type actuator for control service (AUMA RIESTER KG) In order to meet the various standards 3 different motor versions are available. They are based on the standard version of AUMA NORM and can be completed with a control unit (MATIC) for 3-point or steady input signal 4-20 mA. Actuators AUMA NORM for external motor Set point control (command variable) The external motor control switches on or off the motor of the actuator by means of electrical External controller contactors or Thyristor contactor units. The final control element can be returned to the higher process controller by the actuator. Motor control A position transmitter transmits the movement of the final control element as standardized To controll room analog position transmission. This signal can be put at the disposal of the Local control process control as actual value of the position station of the final element control or for a remote indication. AUMA NORM actual value 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA potentiometer Final control element Figure 9.4.11.9.-1:  Actuators AUMA NORM for external motor control

Actuators with incorporated motor control AUMA MATIC AUMA actuators with incorporated motor control and local control station receive the output pressure generated by the process level. It concerns switch impulses switching the motor on or off by electrical contactors or Thyristorreversing units integrated in a MATICunit in opening or closing direction (clockwise or anti-clockwise rotation). The feedback of the final control element for the process controller can be carried out as with the version AUMA NORM.

Set point (command variable) External controller Switch impuls AUMA NORM and AUMAMATIC Local control station actual value 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA potentiometer

Final control element Figure 9.4.11.9.-2:  Actuators AUMA MATIC for external motor control

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 248 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Set point (command variable) 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Actuator with integrated motor control AUMA MATIC and positioner The motorcontrol, local control station and positioner are an elegant and simple solution for the automatization of motor control. The higher process level stipulates the set point signal. The integrated positioner generates the set point signal to position the final control element in dependency of the set point and actual value. The position of the final signal element can be returned to the process level.

AUMA NORM and AUMA MATIC with positioner Local control station Actual Value 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Final control element

Figure 9.4.11.9.-3:  AUMA MATIC

Standard equiment

Torque switching

Limit switching

Accessories Mechanic position indication

Precision potentiometer in simple or tandem version

DUO-limit switching

Position transmission

Reduction gearing

Tandem switching

Figure 9.4.11.9.-4:  AUMA NORM

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Heater

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 249 of 292

9.4.11.10  Electric rotary-type actuator for control service In order to meet the various standards 3 different motor versions are available. They are based on the standard version of AUMA NORM and can be completed with a control unit (MATIC) for 3-point or steady input signal 4-20 mA. Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 NORM

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 AUMA MATIC AC 01.2 BUS

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.2 - 16.2 MATIC AM 01.2

Figure 9.4.11.10.-1:  Multi-turn actuators Generation .2

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 250 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.11  Standard version The switches are put on terminals and must be wired up with the reversing unit in the field (with the exception of AUMA-MATIC). „„ Limit switching: for switching off in the end positions open and closed. The positions can be adjusted separately, quickly and safely. The limit switching is suited for the range 2-500 turns per travel. „„ Torque switching: for switching off the end positions when reaching the adjusted torque. At the same time the torque switching acts as overload protection for the driven valve over the whole travel. The required tripping torque can easily be set at the corresponding dial (in da Nm) for open and close. Switching capacity standard control switch Type of current AC (inductive load) cos φ = 0.8 DC (ohmic load)

30 V 8A 2A

Switching capacity lmax 125 V 6A 0.6 A

Table 9.4.11.11.-1: 

250 V 5A 0.4 A

9.4.11.12  Accessories Tandem switches: „„ Used for switching different potentials. There are two compartments with galvanic separate switches in a housing. Both switches are operated simultaneously, thereby a determined switch sequence exists. One switch which is leading should be used for signalization. Switching capacity tandem switches Type of current AC (inductive load) cos φ = 0.8 DC (ohmic load)

30 V 8A 2A

Switching capacity lmax 125 V 6A 0.6 A

Table 9.4.11.12.-1: 

250 V 5A 0.4 A

„„ DUO-limit switching for generating additional signals in any tow adjustable intermediate positions whatever. „„ Mechanical position indicator at the actuator The exact valve position is continuously indicated by a disc bearing the adjustable symbols for open and closed. This indicator disc is visible through an indicator glass in the switch compartment cover.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 251 of 292

„„ Reduction gearing for the mechanical position indication and or electrical position transmission. With this the entire valve travel is reduced to less than one full turn. „„ Precision potentiometer for the analog position transmission. The potentiometer with high linearity provides a proportional feedback signal being proportional to the travel. „„ Electrical position transducer type RWG or inductive IWG for position transmission by an standard signal of 0/4 to 20 mA. Zero and span can be set at the electrical board. „„ Space heater By integrating a self-regulating space heater in the switch department condensation is almost avoided during considerable temperature variation. 9.4.11.13  Motor „„ Three-phase motor AUMA multi-turn actuators are serialized with three-phase motors (pot-type motor without fan). Technical data Three-phase motor Standard voltage (Only three-phase current) Perm. Fluctuations Style Motor type Degree of protection Cooling method Insulation class Electrical connection Running time Turn-on mode Sense of direction Motor protection 1)

380 V/50 Hz; (220 V/50 Hz); 415 V/50 Hz; 500 V/50 Hz; 440 V/60 Hz; 460 V/60 Hz max. ± 5%1) IM B9 according to DIN IEC 34 part 7 Cage type IP67 (attached to actuator) Natural cooling/surface cooling F according to VDE 0530 Up to SA 16.1: plug-in connector at actuator Direct S4 - 25% relative running time ED, starting frequency for SAR see technical data Right and left (reversing) 3 thermo switches (standard) or thermistors Table 9.4.11.13.-1: 

Overvoltage and or too high frequencies can result in an inadmissible heating of the motor. In case of undervoltage the torque of the motor (breakdown moment) is reduced in quadratic proportion concerning the voltage dropping. When choosing the actuators you have to consider the high voltage fluctuations.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 252 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Position transmission A position transmission is only possible in combination with a reduction gearing. Precision potentiometer Technical specifications „„ Standard data: 0.2 kW; 1.5 W „„ Option: 0.1 kW; 1.0 kW or 5.0 kW available „„ Linearity: ≤ 1 %. Precision potentiometer in tandem version Technical specifications „„ Standard data: 0.2/0.2 kW; 1.5 W „„ Option: 0.5/0.5 kW; 1.0/1.0 kW; 5.0/5.0 kW or 0.2/5.0 kW available „„ Linearity: ≤ 1 %. Precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer Technical specifications „„ Standard data: 5.0 kw; 1.5 W „„ Linearity: £ 1 %. Precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer in tandem version Technical specifications „„ Standard value: 4.7/4.7 kW; 1.5 W „„ Option: 1.0/4.7 kW; „„ Linearity: ≤ 1 %. When using a positioner a precision potentiometer with a semi-conducting layer or an electrical/inductive position transmission (3/4-wire system with isolating transformer has to be used. When using the potentiometer for regulating you must use a precision potentiometer with a semi-conducting layer because of the low temperature drift. A mechanical restriction of the reduction gearing makes it impossible that the potentiometer Reaches the max. Value of resistance. Therefore, an external electrical balance is to be installed.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 253 of 292

Electronic position transducer RWG The actual value of the valve measured by an transducer is converted into injected current by electronic devices. Zero and rate of rise of the position transmission can be easily set by a trimming potentiometer. Output signal 2-wire system 3- or 4- wire system Voltage supply Ambient temperature

4 to 20 mA 0/4 to 20 mA 24 V DC ± 15 % smoothened -20 °C up to +60 °C Table 9.4.11.13.-2: 

Inductive position transmitter system IWG The inductive position transmitter system operates without movable contact. The actual value of the valve is transmitted to the IWG constructed according to the principle of differential transformers. The signal is converted into injected current by electronic devices. Zero and rate of rise of the position transmission can be set. Output signal 2-wire system 3- or 4- wire system Voltage supply Ambient temperature

4 to 20 mA 0/4 to 20 mA 24 V DC ± 15 % smoothened -20 °C up to +60 °C Table 9.4.11.13.-3: 

The electronic transducer RWG and inductive position transmitter IWG can be operated alternatively as 2-, 3- or 4-wire system for 0 to 20 mA (only 3- and 4-wire system) or 4 to 20 mA. An adaption in the field is possible at any time. When using MATIC-Unit with positioner a 3- or 4-wire system can be used. An electronic/ inductive position transmission (3- or 4-wire system) with isolating transformer is to be installed if a constant position transmission (0/4 to 20 mA) is required.

Figure 9.4.11.13.-4:  Multi-turn actuators Generation .2 - AUMA MORM

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 254 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.14  AUMA MATIC AUMA MATIC Universal AM-U Load relay Interlock Max. Voltage Max. Nominal output Actuator for regulation 1) remote control (supply) Max. Pickup delay 2) Max. Delay in disconnection 2) Transmission position to control room Position transmission to control room

Supervision 3)

Local control station Positioner 4) 1)

Nominal power unit Reversing contactors Thyristor reversing unit Mechanical and electric Electronic 500 VAC 460 VAC 7.5 kW 1.5 kW Control 24 V DC supplied from 24 V DC supplied from external sources external sources 20 ms 20 ms 40 ms

25 ms

On-off

On-off

End positions Selector switch in positions local / remote Collective fault signal Power failure Motor protection in operation (thermoswitch) Torque switch tripped in mid-travel Wrong phase sequence or phase failure (option) Selector switch local-off-remote / automatic (lockable) Control switch open-stop-close 4 to 20 mA / 0 to 20 mA (option) Table 9.4.11.14.-1:  AUMA MATIC

Only without positioner 2) Time delay with remote control 3) The multi-return actuator is switched off during the above mentioned faults. The causes are indicated by 2 integrated LEDs (light-emitting diodes) in the motor control AUMA MATIC and can be transmitted as collective fault signal to the control room. 4) Only with precision potentiometer with semi-conducting layer

Figure 9.4.11.14.-2:  AUMAMATIC

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 255 of 292

AUMA regulating actuators are rated for intermittent duty S4 - 25%, permissible number of starts see Figure 9.4.11.10.-1 and Table 9.4.11.14.-1 (description running time ED see enclosure E) „„ Enclosure A: Electrical data for auma three-phase motors „„ Enclosure B: Electrical data for AUMA-Ex three-phase motors „„ Enclosure C: Motor control AUMA MATIC without positioner and with reversing contactor MSP 110AC1--F11E1/KMS TP104/201 „„ Enclosure D: Motor control AUMA MATIC with positioner and thyristor reversing contactor MSP 111700--A21E1/KMS TP140/241 „„ Enclosure E: Intermittent duty under the influence of starting process (S 4) 380 V, 50 Hz Torque during service max. Nm

15

30

60

Type speed 1/min

Nominal Speed input 1/min kW

Current at Size

Nominal current

Tripping torque Starting 1)

A (lN)

A (ca)

A (lA)

SAR 07.1- to 4

0.025

700

63

0.40

0.40

0.68

SAR 07.1- to 5.6

0.025

700

63

0.40

0.40

0.68

SAR 07.1- to 8

0.045

1400

63

0.38

0.40

0.95

SAR 07.1- to 11

0.045

1400

63

0.38

0.40

0.95

SAR 07.5- to 4

0.045

700

63

0.63

0.65

1.0

SAR 07.5- to 5.6

0.045

700

63

0.63

0.65

1.0

SAR 07.5- to 8

0.09

1400

63

0.54

0.60

1.6

SAR 07.5- to 11

0.09

1400

63

0.54

0.60

1.6

SAR 10.1- to 4

0.09

700

71

0.89

0.90

1.7

SAR 10.1- to 5.6

0.09

700

71

0.89

0.95

1.7

SAR 10.1- to 8

0.18

1400

71

1.0

1.1

3.0

SAR 10.1- to 11

0.18

1400

71

1.0

1.2

3.0

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 256 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

380 V, 50 Hz Torque during service max. Nm

120

200

400

Type speed 1/min

Nominal Speed input 1/min kW

Current at Size

Nominal current

Tripping torque Starting 1)

A (lN)

A (ca)

A (lA)

SAR 14.1- to 4

0.18

700

90

1.8

2.0

4.5

SAR 14.1- to 5.6

0.18

700

90

1.8

2.0

4.5

SAR 14.1- to 8

0.37

1400

90

1.1

1.7

4.8

SAR 14.1- to 11

0.37

1400

90

1.1

1.8

4.8

SAR 14.1- to 16

0.75

2800

90

1.9

3.5

8.9

SAR 14.1- to 22

0.75

2800

90

1.9

3.8

8.9

SAR 14.5- to 4

0.37

700

90

2.5

2.8

6.0

SAR 14.5- to 5.6

0.37

700

90

2.5

3.0

6.0

SAR 14.5- to 8

0.75

1400

90

2.3

3.6

9.2

SAR 14.5- to 11

0.75

1400

90

2.3

3.9

9.2

SAR 14.5- to 16

1.5

2800

90

4.3

7.0

18

SAR 14.5- to 22

1.5

2800

90

4.3

7.5

18

SAR 16.1- to 4

0.75

700

90

4.0

4.8

10

SAR 16.1- to 5.6

0.75

700

90

4.0

5.0

10

SAR 16.1- to 8

1.5

1400

90

3.6

6.5

16

SAR 16.1- to 11

1.5

1400

90

3.6

7.4

16

SAR 16.1- to 16

3.0

2800

90

7.6

15

38

SAR 16.1- to 22

3.0

2800

90

7.6

16

38

Table 9.4.11.14.-3:  Technical data of Type SAR 1)

We recommend to select switch gear and cables suitable for these values.

Permissible fluctuations of nominal voltage: ± 5 %. If voltage drops below there will be a reduction of nominal output torque.

Attention! AUMA pot-type motors are serialized with 3 thermoswitches or with ex-actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Electric with a linear or rotational movement

Page 257 of 292

also PTC-thermistor to protect the windings (refer to terminal plans KMS). Our warranty will lapse if those thermoswitches are not connected in the control circuit. Note: For all further data, accessories, and industry codes see the associated technical AUMA data sheet and SAMSON TV-SK 9386-2, 9393 -2, 9394-1 / TV-SK 9402-1 E.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 258 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.4.11.15  Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1

Figure 9.4.11.15.-1:  Wiring diagram AM4R AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 259 of 292

9.5  Explosion-protected actuator 9.5.1.  What is an explosion? A flammable substance and oxygen, in a certain mixture, must be available to set off an explosion. With a suitable source of ignition it then leads to a chemical reaction. If the reaction velocity exceeds the acoustic velocity, this is defined as an explosion. The destructive effect of an explosion is the result of the sudden expansion of the built-up flammable mixture in the form of a blast wave. Three components are required to create an explosion: 1. Fuel (flammable gas, flammable dusts, flammable vapors) 2. Oxygen (in the air or as chemical compounds) 3. Ignition source (ignition sparks, hot surfaces, chemical reactions)

2 1

9.5.2.  What is explosion protection?

3

An explosion hazard can safely be prevented if one of the three mentioned components are successfully eliminated on site. Ignitable mixtures cannot be avoided at many installations. Therefore the occurrence of an ignition source must be prevented.

2

1 3

Electrical equipment is a potential ignition source, but also non-electrical equipment may produce potential ignition sources. Lost heat generates hot surfaces. Electrostatic charges or transient currents can cause ignitable sparks.

Explosion-protection on electrical and mechanical equipment signifies that the occurrence of high temperatures at the surface and of ignitable sparks during operation are prevented by constructional measures. For this reason, the equipment will not be a potential ignition source. 9.5.3.  ATEX Directive 94/9/EC The Directive 94/9/EC is the European Directive for equipment in potentially explosive atmospheres. It defines the general protection objectives (protection of persons and property). One of the most significant differences to the previous regulation is that non-electrical equipment has to be certified for the use in potentially explosive atmospheres. The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization CENELEC revised and issued the technical guidelines for harmonizing the national standards on the basis of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 260 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

ATEX requirements for AUMA products Electrical explosion protection

Non-electrical explosion protection

Electric multi-turn actuators

Multi-turn and part-turn actuator gearing Worm gearboxes Spur and bevel gearboxes Linear thrust units ATEX Directive 94/9/EC

Electric part-turn actuators ATEX Directive 94/9/EC EN 50014 – EN 50020 Equipment group 2 for use in ZONE 1 Group IIC Temperature class T4 Type examination certificate by a notified body such as PTB, IBEXU, or DMT Ex-audit by notified body -product quality assurance

EN 1127-1 EN 13463-1 et seqq. Equipment group 2 for use in ZONE 1 Group IIC Temperature class T4 Evaluation of the equipment by the manufacturer themselves, ignition hazard evaluation with reliability observation Risk analysis Filing of the documentation with a notified body.

Declaration of Conformity/CE marking Table 9.5.3.-1:  ATEX requirements for AUMA products

9.5.4.  Classification of potentially explosive atmospheres Exact knowledge of the conditions under which the devices are to be operated is important for the selection of the electrical equipment. The description is designated by the following terms: „„ Zone/equipment category „„ Explosion group „„ Temperature class 9.5.5.  Zone/equipment category Potentially explosive areas are divided into zones according to the presence of potentially explosive atmospheres. The classification into equipment categories was introduced with the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. It marks the equipment approved for the use in the respective zone. Zones 0, 1, and 2 apply to explosive atmospheres consisting of gases and vapors; zones 20, 21, and 22 apply to atmospheres containing a cloud of combustible dust in air. „„ Zone 0, zone 20 Zone 0 or zone 20 are defined as zones, where an explosive atmosphere consisting of gases and/or vapors or dust is present “continuously or for long periods”. In this zone only category 1 equipment may be used.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 261 of 292

„„ Zone 1, zone 21 These are zones, where a dangerous, explosive atmosphere consisting of gases and/or vapors or dust is likely to occur in normal operation. In this zone only category 1 and 2 equipment may be used. „„ Zone 2, zone 22 These are zones, where a dangerous, explosive atmosphere consisting of gases and/or vapors or dust is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only. In this zone only category 1, 2 and 3 equipment may be used. Explosion-proof AUMA actuators and gearboxes correspond to equipment category II2G or II2D and are therefore appropriate for use in zones 1 and 2 as well as 21 and 22. Furthermore, various actuator types are suitable for use in group I, category M2 in mines.

9.5.6.  Explosion group/temperature class The gases are classified into explosion groups and temperature classes according to their hazardous level. The temperature class defines the permissible maximum surface temperature of the equipment. The explosion group divides the gases according to minimum ignition current and maximum experimental safety gaps. Group I electrical equipment is for use in the mining industry (underground). Group II devices are for applications in all other areas. The hazard level of gases ranges from IIA to IIC. More than 90 % of explosive gases and vapors are covered by explosion groups IIA and IIB. Basically the following applies: Higher explosion groups and lower maximum permissible surface temperatures require greater levels of design for electrical equipment.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 262 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Explosion groups Temperature classes

I

IIA

IIB

IIC

Acetone, Ethane, Ammonia, T1 (450 °C)1)

Methane

Benzol, Acetic acid,

Town gas

Hydrogen

Methanol, Propane, Toluene, etc. Thylalcohol, T2 (300 °C)

n-Butane,

Ethylene,

n-Butanol,

Ethylene oxide

Dichloroethane, etc.

T3 (200 °C)

Benzine, Diesel fuel, Aircraft fuel, n-Hexane, Fuel oil…

T4 (135 °C)

Ethanol

Acetylene

Ethyl ether

T5 (100 °C) T6 (85 °C) 1)

Carbon-disulphide

(max. permissible surface temperatures) Table 9.5.6.-1:  Explosion groups

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 263 of 292

9.5.7.  How to achieve explosion protection? There are different possibilities to qualify electrical equipment and non-electrical equipment for the use in potentially explosive atmospheres. These measures are called protection types. They are described in the European Standards EN 50014 et seqq. for electrical equipment and EN 13463-1 et seqq. for non-electrical equipment. Explosion-proof AUMA actuators are designed to protection types “Increased safety” (EEx e) “Flameproof enclosure” (EEx d), and “Constructional safety” (c). The protection type “Constructional safety” (c) applies to all AUMA valve gearboxes. 9.5.7.1  Increased safety (EEx e) For the protection type “Increased safety”, measures are taken to increase protection against the occurrence of ignition sparks, electric arcs, and of the possibility of excessive temperatures. Special safety regulations for mounting electrical components must be observed. In an increased safety compartment, only explosion-proof components with their own test certificate may be used. For AUMA actuators, this protection type is used for example for the electrical connection. All terminals are sized in such a way that no impermissible hot surfaces or sparks can occur. 9.5.7.2  Flameproof enclosure (EEx d) The protection type “Flameproof enclosure” allows an explosion inside the electrical equipment. Flameproof joints of housing parts are designed in such a way that a flame or burning particles cannot reach the outside. This is achieved by accurate sizing of the gaps and widths of the flameproof joints. The housing is of a rigid design so that it can withstand the pressure developing during an internal explosion without damage. The following parts of AUMA actuators are designed with a flameproof enclosure: „„ Motor compartment „„ Switch compartment „„ Interior of integral controls AUMA MATIC and AUMATIC

L: Gap length, W: Gap width

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 264 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.7.3  Constructional safety (c) This type of protection applies to non-electrical equipment or non-electrical parts of electrical equipment. It was introduced within the framework of the ATEX Directive 94/9/ EC, which for the first time requires the examination of non-electrical equipment. In the European Standard EN 13463-5, this protection type is described as follows:"a type of ignition protection in which constructional measures are applied so as to protect against the possibility of ignition from hot surfaces, sparks and adiabatic compression generated by moving parts." Even before the ATEX Directive came into force, non-electrical equipment was used in potentially explosive atmospheres. By testing this equipment in compliance with the requirements of the constructional safety, it can often be certified for use in potentially explosives atmospheres without any problems or only with minor modification. AUMA valve gearboxes and the gearing section of the actuators meet the requirements of the “Constructional safety”. 9.5.7.4  Who tests what? Electrical equipment The conformity assessment of the electrical equipment for equipment categories 1 and 2 has to be performed by notified European bodies. AUMA actuators are mainly tested and approved by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig, Germany. In addition to the assessment of the explosion protection measures for the electrical equipment, the in-house quality assurance and production are regularly audited by the PTB. AUMA explosion-proof devices are subjected to a 100 % test, i.e. a pressure test and a dimension test of the explosion- proof components are performed. Non-electrical equipment The assessment of the non-electrical equipment regarding their conformity for their use in potentially explosive zone 1 and 2 atmospheres (equipment categories 2 and 3) is incumbent upon the manufacturer. The documentation drawn up during the qualification stage, such as test reports, have to be deposited at a notified body. Due to AUMA’s many years of experience in the field of explosion protection, the necessary expertise to reliably test and certify the non-electrical explosion protection of the AUMA equipment is readily available. The documentation is filed with the PhysikalischTechnische Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig, Germany. Handling explosion-proof electrical equipment - AUMA Service Installation, commissioning, maintenance, repairs, and modification work must, according to EN 60-17, only be performed by qualified personnel with extensive knowledge on how to handle explosion-proof equipment. Explosion-proof equipment must be maintained regularly (at least every 3 years). AUMA service engineers are the specialists in the field of AUMA actuators. They ensure

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 265 of 292

that the required tasks are performed in compliance with the safety requirements. Inspections and maintenance work can be scheduled on a long-term basis by signing maintenance contracts with the AUMA service department. 9.5.7.5  Auma Marking All essential information, from the explosion group to the type of protection and the number of the EC-type-examination certificate, must be included in the equipment marking. In addition to the name plate, an approval plate is fixed to the actuator. This contains all information regarding the explosion protection. Marking 1 Approved mark of the applicable standard here: CENELEC (responsible for the EU)

1

2 Explosion protection classification electrical explosion protection 3 Number of the EC-Typeexamination certificate starts with the abbreviation of the notified body here PTB (Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt) 2

3

4

a

c

b

a

e

g

d

b

f

c

h

4 Explosion protection classification non-electrical explosion protection a Equipment group (mining industry I, other areas II) b Category 2 (for zone I) c Medium (G = Gas or D = Dust) d Area of standards application (E for European Standard) e Explosion-protected electrical equipment f Protection types (here flameproof enclosure and increased safety) g Explosion group h Temperature class a see above b Protection type (here constructional safety) c see above

Figure 9.5.7.5.-1:  Marking

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 266 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.7.6  Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection What has an electric actuator got to do with non-electrical explosion protection? In simple terms, an actuator can be divided into an electrical part - motor, electrical connection, and sensor system - and a non-electrical (gearing) part. To provide complete explosion protection, the equipment has been checked according to the requirements for both the electrical and the non-electrical explosion protection. The electrical explosion protection features were certified by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) in Braunschweig, Germany, the examination according to the requirements of the non-electrical explosion protection was performed in accordance with AUMA standards.

1

5

2

3

4

Figure 9.5.7.6.-1:  Electric actuators and non-electrical explosion protection

Blue non-electrical part of the actuator Type of protection: Constructional safety 1 Handwheel for emergency operation 2 Gear housing with worm gearing and hollow output shaft Red electrical part of the actuator Type of protection: Flameproof enclosure and increased safety 3 Motor coupling 4 Motor 5 Electrical connection with switch compartment inside

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 267 of 292

AUMA has an extensive range of explosion-proof actuators. Multi-turn, part-turn, and linear actuators with a wide torque and thrust spectrum allow solutions for nearly every valve automation task. Combinations In addition to the electric actuators for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the AUMA product range includes various valve gearboxes for multi-turn and part-turn movement. When combining them with the multi-turn actuators, the available torque range is extended. Certificates outside the European Union Certificates of Conformity issued from national test authorities in other countries, e.g. USA, Canada, CIS, Brazil, Japan, India, etc., are also available. Further information regarding the devices Further brochures describing the scope of performance plus technical data sheets are available on request. Auma Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves Multi-turn actuators SAExC 07.1 – SAExC 16.1 SARExC 07.1 – SARExC 16.1 in version AUMA NORM 1 torque between 10 and 1 000 Nm speed between 4 and 180 rms II2G EEx de IIC T4 II2G c IIC T4 II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130°C up to size 10.1 additionally I M2 Ex de I

Combinations Multi-turn actuator/linear thrust unit SAExC/LE thrusts as from 4 kN – 217 kN travels up to 500 mm running speeds between 20 mm/min and 360 mm/min II2G EEx de IIC T4 II2G c IIC T4 II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130°C

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 268 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Auma Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves Multi-turn actuators SAEx 25.1 – SAEx 40.1 torque between 630 and 16 000 Nm speed between 4 and 90 rms II2G EEx ed IIB T4 II2G c IIB T4 II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130°C

Combinations multi-turn actuator/spur gearboxes SA(R)ExC/GST torque up to 16,000 Nm II2G EEx de IIC T4 II2G c IIC T4 II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130°C

Combinations multi-turn actuator/spur gearboxes SA(R)ExC/GK torque up to 16,000 Nm II2G EEx de IIC T4 II2G c IIC T4 II2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T130°C Actuators with fireproof housing Certain applications in the oil and gas industry require fireproof actuators to close the valve within a defined time span in case of fire. AUMA offers the electric multi-turn actuators SAExC and part-turn actuators SGExC in a fireproof version. A special coating ensures full functionality of the actuators for at least 30 minutes if exposed to a temperature of up to 1,100 °C. Figure 9.5.7.-7:  Multi-turn actuators e.g. for gate valves and globe valves

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

9.5.8.  Explosion-protected actuator

Explosion proof

Type ExRun (Yellow) Type RedRun Nominal thrust: 500 to 10,000 N Rated travel: 5 to 60 mm Control mode: On-off, Three-point stepping and modulating

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 269 of 292

Page 270 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.8.1  Explosion-protected actuator from Company SCHISCHEK The explosion-proof actuators from SCHISCHEK1), Germany are tested and approved for the use in hazardous area. The new Type ExRun valve actuators are a revolution for safety, control valve and other motorized applications for HVAC systems, in Chemical, Pharmaceutical, Industrial and Offshore-/Onshore plants, for use in Ex-areas zone 1, 2 (Gas) and zone 21, 22 (Dust). Highest protection class (ATEX) and IP 66 protection, small dimensions, only 7 kg weight, universal functions and technical data, an integrated heater guarantee safe operation even under difficult environmental conditions. High quality brush less motors guarantee long life. All actuators are programmable and adjustable on site. Special tools or equipment are not required. Five motor running times and two forces, according to the actuator Type, are selectable or adjustable on site. The integrated universal power supply is self adaptable to input voltages in the range of 24 to 230 V AC / DC. The actuators are 100% overload protected and self locking. The modular concept offers the possibility to mount adjustable end switches, potentiometers, and additional equiped with an analog output 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA for signalization. Explosion proof linear actuators Type ExRun and RedRun ExRun

Explosion proof zone 1, 2, 21, 22 Gas + Dust, PTB-certified, II 2(1) G Ex de [ia] IIC T6, II 2(1) D Ex tD [iaD] A21 IP66 T80 ATEX 94/9/EC

1)

RedRun

Explosion proof zone 2, 22 Gas + Dust, PTB-certified II 3(1) G Ex nC [ia] IIC T6, II 3 G Ex nC II T6, II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP66 T80, II 3(1) D Ex tD [iaD] A22 IP66 T80, ATEX 94/9/EC

http://www.schischek.com

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 271 of 292

Explosion proof linear actuators Type ExRun and RedRun Description

Delivery

Type ExRun and Type RedRun Valve actuators are used for automation of Globe valves 2- and 3-way with control mode for: „„ On-off „„ Three-point stepping „„ Modulating

Actuator with integrated Ex-e terminal box, Emergency manual override.

Basics for ExRun and RedRun valve actuators „„ 24 to 240 V AC/DC self adaptable power supply „„ Up to 5 different running times adjustable on site „„ 5 to 60 mm stroke, mechanical limitation on each position „„ Automatic adaptation of modulating signal at Type ExRun, RedRun „„ Aluminium housing IP66, integrated terminal box „„ -20 to +40°C/+50°C, integrated heater „„ Emergency manual override „„ Dimension (H*x W x D) 260 x 208 x 115 mm (Dimension without adaptation) *Height = variable, depending on Type. Ambient temperature Ambient temperature -30 °C Humidity Motor Supply voltage, Frequency Operation mode

-20 to + 40°C at T6 / -20 to + 50°C at T5 -30 to + 40°C at T6 / -30 to + 50°C at T5 - limited force approx. 60% of the nominal value, e.g. 5 kN = 3 kN (max), Icing is not 0 to 95 % rH non condensing Brush less DC Motor 24 to 230 V AC/DC + 15/- 20 %, 50 to 60 Hz ± 20 % S3/50 % ED = duty cycle (max. 600 operating cycles / h)

Power consumption

Max. 20 W (in acc. with voltage, I Start >> I rated)

Heater consumption

Approx. 16 W, (motor is not running in this moment)

Cable gland Manual override Necessary accessories:

M20 ∙ 1.5 II2GD Ex-e approved, Gable diameter 0.6 to 13 mm Change from auto to hand mode with sidewise (red) switch and turn with the all en key top side Valve adaptation in acc. with valve manufacturer, Type and nominal size (diameter).

Table 9.5.8.1.-1:  Technical data of Type ExRun and Type RedRun Valve actuators

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 272 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.8.2  Accessories and special designs (additional price) Type ExRun Type RedRun ExSwitch RedSwitch InSwitch ExBox-SW RedBox-SW InBox-SW MKK-S HV-R Adaptation GMB-1

Aluminium housing with Amercoat painting, resistant against corrosive and/or maritime atmosphere, some parts nickel plated 2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable Ex-aux. switches with 2 potentail free contacts, additionally Ex-e terminal box + mounting bracket necessary 2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable Ex-aux. switches with 2 potentail free contacts, additionally Ex-e terminal box + mounting bracket necessary 2 external, adaptable, on site adjustable switches with 2 potentail free contacts, additionally terminal box+ mounting bracket necessary Ex-e terminal box suitable for ExRun to valve-actuators with external switches ExSwitch Ex-e terminal box suitable for RedRun to valve-actuators with external switches RedSwitch Terminal box suitable for InRun to valve-actuators which external switches InSwitch Mounting-bracket suitable for to Box-terminal boxes for direct mounting on to Run actuators size „S` Manual override suitable for to Run valve actuators size „S` Different adaptations for different valve types and sizes available. Please don't hesitate to ask for technical solution Rubber bellow up to 60 mm, color black Table 9.5.8.2.-1:  Accessories and special designs

Mounting of to ..Switch

Figure 9.5.8.2.-2:  Mounting of Switch

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 273 of 292

9.5.8.3  Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type ExRun Force N

Running time sec/mm

Control mode

ExRun- 5.10-X

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

ExRun- 25.50-X

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

RedRun- 75.100-X

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

RedRun- 5.10

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExRun- 25.50

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExRun- 75.100

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

Type

ExRun- 5.10-S

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

2/3/6/9/12

Feedback

Features

On-off, Three-point

2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1)

On-off, Three-point

2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1) 2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1)

ExRun- 25.50-S

2,500 / 15,000

ExRun- 75.100-S

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

ExRun- 5.10-P

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

ExRun- 25.50-P

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

ExRun- 75.100-P

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

ExRun- 5.10-Y

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

ExRun- 25.50-Y

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

ExRun- 75.100-Y

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

ExRun- 5.10-U

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

ExRun- 25.50-U

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

ExRun- 75.100-U

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

Table 9.5.8.3.-1:  Ex-d valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type ExRun 1) Switching points are fix! (See table)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 274 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.8.4  Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type RedRun Force N

Running time sec/mm

Control mode

RedRun- 5.10-X

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

RedRun- 25.50-X

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

RedRun- 75.100-X

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

ExSwitch not adaptable

RedRun- 5.10

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

RedRun- 25.50

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

RedRun- 75.100

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

Type

RedRun- 5.10-S

RedRun- 25.50-S

500 / 11,000

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

2/3/6/9/12

Feedback

Features

On-off, Three-point

2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1)

On-off, Three-point

2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1) 2 aux. switch, fixed switching points 1)

7,500 / 10,000 RedRun- 75.100-S (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

RedRun- 5.10-P

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

RedRun- 25.50-P

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

RedRun- 75.100-P

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point, Potentiometer

Potentiometer 1.000 Ω

RedRun- 5.10-Y

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

RedRun- 25.50-Y

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

RedRun- 75.100-Y

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

RedRun- 5.10-U

500 / 11,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

RedRun- 25.50-U

2,500 / 15,000

2/3/6/9/12

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

RedRun- 75.100-U

7,500 / 10,000 (8,000)

4/6/9/12/15

On-off, Three-point

0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA

Table 9.5.8.4.-1:  Ex-n valve actuators without spring return, 24 to 240 V AC/DC Type RedRun 1) Switching points are fix! (See table)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 275 of 292

ExRun and RedRun Valve adaption To select the right valve adaptation and get the right price information the following data are required: „„ Valve manufacturer

Type ExRun- to . Type RedRun- to .

„„ Valve Type „„ Valve nominal size (diameter) DN/NPS For adaptations which are still designed by Schischek this data are minimum requirements. To design new adaptations we need additional details of the valve body as well as drawings.

Adaption

At purchase order you have to order both parts actuator + adaptation. Hazardous Locations Hazardous locations Zone 1, 2, 21, and 22

Safe area

Supply 24 to 230 V AC/DC Version ExRun- ...-S Limit switches 24 V / 1 A 230 V / 0.25 A Version ExRun- ...-P Potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω Version ExRun-...-U Feedback 0 to 10 V / 4 to 20 mA Figure 9.5.8.4.-2:  Valve adaption and hazaedous locations

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 276 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.8.5  Wiring diagram of Type ExRun On-off and Three-point stepping

Internal switches

Figure 9.5.8.5.-1:  A) Wiring diagrams of Type ExRun

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Explosion-protected actuator

Page 277 of 292

Wiring diagram of Type ExRun Potentiometer

Feedback signal V / mA

Table 9.5.8.5.-2:  B) Wiring diagrams of Type ExRun

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 278 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.5.9.  Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator

Type: Explosion protection: Power supply: Travel: Nominal force: Motor running time: Spring return: Control mode: Feedback: Ambient temperature: Degree of protection: Manual override:

RedRun-5.10-Y (Standard 7031-2959129) PTB 09 ATEX 1016X II2 D Ex tD (iaD) A21 Zone 21 and 22 24 to 230 V AC/DC universal supply unit, self-adapting 7.5 mm for micro-flow valve (adjustable between 5 and 60 mm) 500 to 1000 N (adjustable) 2/3/6/9/12 seconds/mm (adjustable) None 0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA (adjustable) 0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA (adjustable) –20 °C to +40 °C / 50 °C IP 66 Integrated

Attachment:

Directly onto Type 3510

On request:

Three-step, offshore coating, rubber bellows, external auxiliary

Technical data of actuator: SAMSON receives the actuator from SCHISCHEK ready for connection. Preferably, the actuator is to be mounted in the upright position. Otherwise, suitable supports must be fitted to the actuator if it is mounted in a different position. If the actuator is installed outdoors, the following points must be observed: Actuator must be fitted with built-in heating and a protective roof (to protect the actuator from direct sunshine/ snow) must be provided on site. Further information available at http://www.schischek.com Figure 9.5.9.-1:  Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve with explosion-proof electric actuator

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Page 279 of 292

9.6  Hydraulic with a linear movement Hydraulic actuators or hydraulic cylinders typically involve a hollow cylinder having a piston inserted in it. The two sides of the piston are alternately pressurized/de-pressurized to achieve controlled precise linear displacement of the piston and in turn the entity connected to the piston. The physical linear displacement is only along the axis of the piston/cylinder. This design is based on the principles of hydraulics. A familiar example of a manually operated hydraulic actuator is a hydraulic car jack. Typically though, the term "hydraulic actuator" refers to a device controlled by a hydraulic pump. Piston Forces Extending

A1

pe F1

d1

pe

= Gage pressure

A1, A2 = Piston areas F1

= Piston force when extending

F2

= Piston force when retracting

d 1

= Piston diameter

d 2

= Piston rod diameter

η

= Efficiency

Retracting

A2

1bar = 10 F2

N cm2

F = pe ∙ A ∙ η d2

pe

Example: What are the effecitive piston forces? Hydraulic cylinder with d1 = 100 mm, d2 = 70 mm, η = 0.85 and pe = 60 bar. Extending

N π ⋅ (10 cm ) F1 = pe ⋅ A1 ⋅ η = 600 ⋅ ⋅ 0.85 = 40,065 N cm2 4 2

Retracting 2 2   N π ⋅ (10 cm ) − ( 7 cm )  F2 = pe ⋅ A 2 ⋅ η = 600 ⋅ ⋅ 0.85 = 20,428 N cm2 4

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 280 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.6.1.  Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators Hydraulic ranges Hydraulic ranges actuators are designed to provide a rotary, quarter-turn movement for either on/off or modulating duty. The robust design incorporates double sealing for superior environmental protection and features a one-piece ductile iron cast centre body. Hydraulic torque output up to 95,425 lbf-in (10,780 Nm). „„ Steel and ductile iron construction. „„ Inherently safe, factory welded spring-return module. „„ Exclusive Rotork double ‘O’ ring sealing for proven protection against leakage in oilfilled service. „„ Special build available for nuclear power plant safety related valve applications class 1E, in standard IEEE323. „„ AWWA C540 compliant build available.

Figure 9.6.1.-1:  Hydraulic Scotch Yoke Valve Actuators (Photo: Rotork)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Page 281 of 292

9.6.1.1  Reliability by Design Hydraulic range scotch yoke actuators are designed to operate ball, butterfly and plug valves requiring a quarter-turn movement for either on/off or modulating duty applications. Sharing a versatile, modular, construction and many components; they are available in both double-acting and spring-return configurations. The robust design incorporates double sealing for superior environmental protection and features a one-piece ductile iron cast centre body to maintain correct bearing alignment. The centre body is available in two sizes. A pneumatic cylinder can be attached to either or both sides. A spring canister can also be fitted to either side for Emergency Shut Down (ESD) applications. Modular construction and stocking of components by Rotork Fluid Systems' Centres of Excellence and a worldwide network of distributors facilitates quick delivery times. 9.6.1.2  Safety by Design Hydraulic range actuators have been designed to be inherently safe. The springs are contained within a factory welded spring canister with a unique and patented fastening arrangement that ensures user safety when removing the canister. The pneumatic cylinder features tie rods specially designed for excessive pressure relief and the centre body is equipped with a pressure relief valve for further operational safety. 9.6.1.3  High Performance by Design Superior design features enable a much longer service life than competitive products. Hydraulic range actuators are capable of a least 200,000 cycles under full load. Units in the field with more typical loads may achieve several times that. Operating Pressure: Pneumatic up to 250 psi (17 bar)

Hydraulic up to 3,000 psi (207 bar)

Torque Output:

Pneumatic up to 88,000 lbf-in (9,942 Nm)



Hydraulic up to 95,425 lbf-in (10,780 Nm)

Temperature Ranges: Standard:

-10°F to 200°F (-23°C to 93°C)

High:

-15°F to 325°F (-26°C to 162°C)

Low:

-40°F to 200°F (-40°C to 93°C)

Extreme Low:

-60°F to 200°F (-51°C to 93°C)

9.6.1.4  Override Options A dependable manual override facility is an important part of many valve/actuator applications. Rotork Fluid Systems has a variety of override options to meet virtually any requirement. Available options include handwheel jackscrew, hydraulic hand pump and gearbox solutions.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 282 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.6.1.5  Key Design Features „„ Rated life of 200,000 cycles—tested against a full load over the entire output stroke. Robust steel and ductile iron construction. Single piston rod electroless nickel-plated for corrosion-free durability, lubricity and long life of bearings and crown seals. „„ External tie-rods an pneumatic piston cylinder specially designed for excessive pressure relief to ensure operational safety. „„ Long life, aluminum bronze friction slipper with low backlash delivers excellent performance for heavy-duty modulating. Integral piston rod support ensures long piston, rod and bearing life by maintaining perfect alignment under all load conditions. Inherently safe, factory welded spring-return module with unique safety fastening (US Patent No. 4 350 08) ensures containment of spring forces when module is removed. Double O-ring sealing for proven protection against leakage in oil-filled service. „„ Phosphate and molybdenum disulphide coated torque plug bearings combined with weather protection seals for maximum environmental protection.

Figure 9.6.1.5.-1:  (Photo: Rotork)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Page 283 of 292

9.6.1.6  VETEC Rotary valve with Pleiger hydraulic actuator The Pleiger1 EHS- System is constructed as a de-centralized system offering an alternative to the conventional system. Each EHS forms a self-contained unit. The connections between actuators and the control system are exclusively electrical. It combines the advantages of the hydraulic system and the electrical unit perfectly and reduces procuring and assembling time. Highlights „„ Small size – high torque „„ P 67, IP 68 on request „„ Contact free limit switches „„ Position indicator „„ Small oil capacity „„ Low noise level „„ ATEX, optinal „„ Bus Interface, optional „„ Submersible, optional „„ Energy efficient, cost saving

Figure 9.6.1.6.-1:  Rotary valve with PLEIGER hydraulic actuator (Photo: VETEC)

1 http://www.pleiger.de

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 284 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.6.2.  Hydraulic- actuating systems of Welland & Tuxhorn AG Welland & Tuxhorn AG is a specialist for Steam conversion and Bypass technology and manufactures own hydraulic-actuating systems.

Figure 9.6.2.-1:  Welland & Tuxhorn - Hydraulic actuating system Type NBF 400

Figure 9.6.2.-2:  Welland & Tuxhorn - Steam pressure check device. Steam testing unit for safety steam reducing control valves (HD-Bypass Stations)

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Page 285 of 292

Hydraulic Actuator

Figure 9.6.2.-3:  Control valves for water and steam Type RVG with Hydraulic Actuator

9.6.2.1  Functions Secure positioning of main control valves in control circuits of power stations and all other types of technical processing facilities. Solutions for complex control and regulation tasks; also with the assistance of compact form Profibus connectors. Integration of safety functions such as turbine, boiler or condenser protection. Provision of emergency strokes during auxiliary energy malfunctions. Advantages „„ Easy to regulate „„ Very high operating force „„ Very high rigidity „„ High operating-velocity „„ Prototype tested and approved according to TRD 421 „„ Safe positioning with cup springs „„ Variable configuration due to modular construction methods „„ Double-acting cylinders

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 286 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.6.2.2  Design The hydraulic power array consists of a drive assembly (see Figure 9.6.2.-1); the servo valve serves as actuating element and the cylinder as drive element for the control valve (see Figure 9.6.2.-3. Hydraulic Generally, the input of the set point value follows as an analogue Actuator electrical signal, and can originate from several sources. The actual value of the controlled variable is read by the measurement device and is then also converted into an analogue signal. The actual value comparison follows in the measuring device. This means that the control difference is arrived at. This is then amplified, assigned a particular transmission behavior (PID behavior) and added as control variable to the servo valve. The amplifier to the servo valve is located between the controller and the servo valve. This interface converts the control variable current into magnetic current, and also contains the position regulatory system of the servo valve.

9.6.2.3  Setup of an electro-hydraulic Control Loop (See Figure 9.6.2.3.-1) The hydraulic power line consists of the actuator, the servo-valve (as the positioner), and the hydraulic motor or cylinder used as final controlling element. The input of the setpoint generally is in form of an analog electric Signal which can originate from different sources. Frequently these sources can be potentiometers, function generators, numeric controls or signals which come from other machine actuating systems. The actual value of the controlled variable is acquired by the measuring system and is also converted to an analog signal. The comparison between setpoint and actual value is carried out in the electronic control amplifier, i.e. the system deviation is calculated. This deviation is amplified, is provided with a specified response characteristic (PIDcharacteristics) and is provided to the servo-valve as the manipulated variable. A power amplifier of the servo-valve is located between the controller and the valve. This interface converts the voltage of the manipulated variable into a magnetic current and contains the position control systems of the servo valve.

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Hydraulic with a linear movement

Page 287 of 292

Figure 9.6.2.3.-1:  Hydraulic power loop of an control valve

NBF NBF NBF NBF

Hydraulic Positioning Systems 160 for 1 Valve 250 for 2 to 4 Valves 400 for 4 to 8 Valves 630 for 5 to 10 Valves

Table 9.6.2.3.-2:  Hydraulic Positioning Systems

Advantages „„ Box-type design Multi-function blocks in modular setup „„ Compact installation „„ Reduction of costs for piping and joints „„ Reduction of installation costs due to the simple exchange of function blocks „„ Oil tank with integrated oil sump acc. to DIN 24339 „„ Level and temperature monitoring devices „„ Double stroke hand pump „„ High pressure double switching filter „„ Hydraulic storage facility used as supply and acceleration storage facility „„ Motor pumps each with 100% delivery rate „„ Electronic pressure switch with digital display „„ Hydraulic cylinder (balanced type) with or without safety cupspring assembly „„ Large alarm unit with mechanical switches and an electronic position transmitter (0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA) „„ Electronic cubicle with programmable controllers type SIMATIC S7

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 288 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

Figure 9.6.2.3.-3:  HYDRAULIC SERVO SYSTEMS TYPE "NBF" 160, 250, 400, 630 for Control Valves Safety Functions acc. to TÜV. SV. 92-886

9.6.2.4  Hydraulic Servo-Systems - Establishment and Manufacturing For conventional and nuclear power stations, or for industrial facilities: Welland & Tuxhorn delivers suitable control fittings – from level control to injection and safety valves. By constantly sharing and exchanging Know How with renowned power station planners and operators, as well as with technical and scientific institutions, we have gained experience in theory and practice. This experience has been converted into better and better products. Specific solutions, innovative solutions, fulfilling the highest technical requirements. Special considerations concerning spatial and constructional conditions mostly demand sound and expert compromises. Use our experience, and let our engineers and technicians advise you. The common goal is to find the best-possible solution – together!

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7

Page 289 of 292

9.7  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7 Data Sheet for Control Valves ( - Minimum details for the selection and the sizing of one valve) Site of control Measuring and control task Pipeline Pipe material Process medium State at the input

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 39 40 43 45 47 48 49 52 54 55

min. Flow rate Input pressure p1 Output pressure p2 Temperature T1 Input density p1 or M Steam pressure Pv Critical pressure Pc Kinematic viscosity v Calculation of max. flow rate coefficient Kv Calculation of min. flow rate coefficient Kv Selected flow rate coefficient Kvs Calculated sound pressure level ... dB(A) Control Valve Type Style Nominal pressure PN ... Nominal size DN ... - flange Type of connection - standard Bonnet shape Body/bonnet material - linear Characteristic Plug/stem material Bushing/seat material Hard facing - none ... % Kvs Leckage class - standard Packing material

91

Valve body Actuator Positioner Limit switch

70 71 72 73 76 78 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 88

Solenoid valve

57 60 62 63 64 66 67 68

Operating data

1 2 7 8 12 13

Actuator type Effective area Supply air pressure Bench range Fail-safe action Other operating mode Fail-safe action with three-way valve Additional manual operation Positioner Type Input signal Control valve opened at Control valve closed at Air connection max. Explosion protection Limit switch Type Limit switch Switching position Switching function Explosion protection Solenoid valve Type Style If power fails, valve should Electric data

DN ... - liquid

- pneumatic ... cm2 min.

PN ... - steam

max.

- welding end - welded-neck end - insulating section bellows seal

unit

- DIN/ - ANSI - heating jacket

- equal percentage

- partly stellited class - type

- purely stellited

max. - open - electrohydraulic

- no

- yes

- stop - hand-operated

- electric ... mA ... mA - Exd

- electric - closed - closing - EExi

- inductive - % travel - opening - EExd

- 2-way - open

- 3-way - close

... V

- vapor

standard

- closed - electric

- pneumatic ... bar ... bar ... bar - EExi

Class ...

... Hz

- pneumatic - open

- stop ... W

Table 9.7.-1:  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to DIN EN 60 534-7

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

- hardened

Page 290 of 292

Chapter 9.  Control valve actuators

9.8  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1 Project Unit P. O . Item Contract Mfr Serial*

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Lube

Type Size Rated Travel Characteristic Balanced/Unbalanced Rate Cv FL XT Plug/Ball/Disk Material Seat Material Cage/Guide Material Stem Material

NEC C lass

Group

Div.

68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

ACTUATOR

* Type * Mfr & Model * Size Eff Area O n/ O ff Modulating Spring Action Open/ Close * Max Allowable Pressure * Min Required Pressure Available Instr. Air Max Min Supply Pressure * Bench Ran ge Act Orientation Handwheel Type Air Fails Valve Set at Input signal

POSITIONER

In Out

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

* Type * Mfr & Model * On Increasing Signal Output Incr/Decr Gauges Bypass * Cam Characteristic

SWITCHES

SERVICE CONDITIONS LINE

* * * * * * * * *

ANSI Class

Shut-O ff –

– – – – 0 –

% dB(A)

Pipe Line Size In & Schedule Out Pipeline Insulation * Type * Size Max Press/Temp * Mfr & Model * Body/Bonnet Matl * Liner Matl/ID End Connection Flg Face Finish End Ext/Matl * Flow Direction * Type of Bonnet Lub & Iso Valve * Packing Material * Packing Type

Max Flow

of

Type * Mfr & Model Contacts/Rating Actuation Points

AIRSET

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Units

Flow Rate Inlet Pressure Outlet Pressure Inlet Temperature Density / Spec Grav / Mol Wt Viscosity / Spec Heat Ratio Vapor Pressure Pv * Required Cv * Travel Allowable/*Predicted SPL

* Mfr & Model * Set Pressure Filter

TESTS

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

VALVE BODY / BONNET

13 14 15

TRIM

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Fluid

SPECIALS / ACCESSORIES

1

Data Sheet Date Spec Tag Dwg Service Crit Press Pc Min Flow Norm Flow

Rev

Quantity

Gauges

* Hydrostatic Pressure ANSI/FCI Leakage Class Date

Revision

Orig

* Information supplied by manufacturer unless already specified.

Table 9.8.-1:  Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

App

Data Sheet for Control Valves according to ISA Form S20.50. Rev. 1

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

Page 291 of 292

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de